Navigation

  • Page 1

    Basic Functions 369,___________________ 307,___________ 281,___________________ 231,___________________ 161,___________________ 79,___________________ 3,___________________ 1703,___________________ 1583,___________________ 1389,___________________ 1335,___________________ 1225,________________...

  • Page 2

    Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NÜRNBERG GERMANY Order number: 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Ⓟ 04/2013 Technical data subject to change Copyright © Siemens AG 1994 - 2013.All rights reserved Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in ord...

  • Page 3

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3 Preface SINUMERIK documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in the following categories: ● General documentation ● User documentation ● Manufacturer/service documentation Additional information You can find inform...

  • Page 4

    Preface Basic Functions 4 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 SINUMERIK You can find information on SINUMERIK under the following link: actionURI(http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik):www.siemens.com/sinumerik Target group This publication is intended for: ● Project engineers ● Tec...

  • Page 5

    Preface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 5 Information on the structure and contents Installation Structure of this Function Manual: ● Inner title (page 3) with the title of the Function Manual, the SINUMERIK controls as well as the software and the version for w...

  • Page 6

    Preface Basic Functions 6 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Signal address The description of functions include as <signal address> of an NC/PLC interface signal, only the address valid for SINUMERIK 840D sl. The signal address for SINUMERIK 828D should be taken from ...

  • Page 7

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7 Table of Contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3,3 1 A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and funct...

  • Page 8

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 8 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1.5.3.4 Signals from operator panel front................................................................................................ 75,75 1.5.3.5 Signals to channel...........................................

  • Page 9

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9 2.5.2.1 Definition and activation of protection zones ......................................................................... 146,....146 2.6 Data lists ............................................................

  • Page 10

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 10 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.10.1.1 General machine data............................................................................................................... 227,227 3.10.1.2 Channelspecific machine data .........................

  • Page 11

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 11 4.2.12.2 Programming.......................................................................................................... 250,....................250 4.2.13 Path-jerk limitation (channel-specific) ............

  • Page 12

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 12 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 5.2.2.2 Fixed stop is reached................................................................................................................ 286,286 5.2.2.3 Fixed stop is not reached.............................

  • Page 13

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13 6.6 Optimization of the control ............................................................................................... 355,..........355 6.6.1 Position controller, position setpoint filter: Balancing fi...

  • Page 14

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 14 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.13.6 Auxiliary function output with a type 5 block search (SERUPRO)............................................ 422,422 7.13.7 ASUB at the end of the SERUPRO ....................................................

  • Page 15

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15 8.7.5 Examples for block search with calculation .............................................................................. 487,.487 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO..............................................

  • Page 16

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 16 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.10.1.1 General functionality ................................................................................................................. 559,559 8.10.1.2 Sequence of an interrupt routine in program ope...

  • Page 17

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17 8.17 Data lists ............................................................................................................... 638,.....................638 8.17.1 Machine data......................................

  • Page 18

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 18 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.2.3 Rotation Overview (geometry axes only).................................................................................. 690,690 9.5.2.4 Rotation with a Euler angles: ZY'X" convention (RPY angles)...

  • Page 19

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 19 9.6.3 Special reactions....................................................................................................... 775,.................775 9.7 Restrictions .............................................

  • Page 20

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 20 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.3 PLC operating system version .................................................................................................. 812,812 12.4 PLC mode selector.................................................

  • Page 21

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 21 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector.................................................................................... 875,..875 12.15.1 Supplementary conditions.............................................

  • Page 22

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 22 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.8 FB 10: Safety relay (SI relay).................................................................................................... 953,953 12.16.9 FB 11: Brake test .......................................

  • Page 23

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 23 13.1.2.1 Data that are cyclically exchanged .......................................................................................... 1055,1055 13.1.2.2 Alarms and messages ........................................

  • Page 24

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 24 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.3 Displaying the status in a status chart .................................................................................... 1112,1112 13.4.3.1 Properties of a status chart ................................

  • Page 25

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 25 13.6.5.1 General .................................................................................................................................... 1170,1170 13.6.5.2 Job start ...................................

  • Page 26

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 26 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.12.1.3 Axis/spindlespecific machine data ..................................................................................... 1222,1222 14.12.2 Signals.........................................................

  • Page 27

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 27 15.8.4 Minimum / maximum speed of the gear stage............... 1314,..........................................................1314 15.8.5 Diagnosis of spindle speed limitation......................................

  • Page 28

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 28 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 16.4.8 Feedrate for chamfer/rounding FRC, FRCM........................................................................... 1374,1374 16.4.9 Non-modal feedrate FB....................................................

  • Page 29

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 29 17.5.2 Selecting the TRC (G41/G42).................................................................................................. 1429,1429 17.5.3 Approach and retraction behavior (NORM/KONT/KONTC/KONTT) 143...

  • Page 30

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 30 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.11.1 General.................................................................................................................................... 1528,1528 17.11.2 Description of function.......................

  • Page 31

    Table of Contents Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 31 18.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) .................................................................................... 1621,1621 18.2.1 Signals to channel (DB21, ...) .....................................

  • Page 32

    Table of Contents Basic Functions 32 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 33

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 33 A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 11.1 Brief description Contents The PLC/NCK interface comprises a data interface on one side and a function interface on the other. The data interface contains status and control s...

  • Page 34

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 34 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Cyclic signal exchange The following interface signals are transferred cyclically, i.e. in the clock grid of the OB1, by the basic PLC...

  • Page 35

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 35 References ● Description of the basic PLC program: → Function Manual, Basic Functions, Basic PLC Program (P3) ● Description of th...

  • Page 36

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 36 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB10 DBX109.6 (ambient temperature alarm) The ambient temperature or fan monitoring function has responded. DB10 DBX109.7 (NCK batte...

  • Page 37

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 37 Screen darkening via keyboard/automatic screen saver If no buttons are pressed on the operator panel front within the assigned time (de...

  • Page 38

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 38 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB19 DBB17 (part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred from the user list) Control byte for file transfer via hard di...

  • Page 39

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 39 DB31, ... DBX1.3 (axis/spindle disable) Axis disable when machine axis is at rest No traversing request (manual or automatic) is carrie...

  • Page 40

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 40 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note When the controller enable is set from follow-up mode, if the part program is active, the last programmed position is approached ...

  • Page 41

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 41 Figure 1-2 Trajectory for clamping and "hold" Figure 1-3 Trajectory for clamping and "follow-up"

  • Page 42

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 42 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Drives with analog setpoint interface A drive with an analog setpoint interface is capable of traversing the machine axis with an exter...

  • Page 43

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 43 Monitoring If a machine axis is in follow-up mode, the following monitoring mechanisms will not act: ● Zero-speed monitoring ● Clam...

  • Page 44

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 44 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The table below shows the functionality of the interface signals in conjunction with the "controller enable". DB31, ... DBX1...

  • Page 45

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 45 Canceling the controller enable when the machine axis is in motion: If a machine axis is part of an interpolatory path motion or coupli...

  • Page 46

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 46 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Synchronizing the actual value (reference point approach) Once the controller enable has been set, the actual position of the machine a...

  • Page 47

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 47 DB31, ... DBX9.0 / 9.1 / 9.2 (controller parameter set) Request for activation of the specified controller parameter set. Controller p...

  • Page 48

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 48 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX9.3 (parameter set specification disabled by NC) Parameter set changeover request will be ignored. 1.2.7 Signals from axis...

  • Page 49

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 49 DB31, ... DBX76.0 (lubrication pulse) Following a control POWER ON/RESET, the signal status is 0 (FALSE). The "lubrication puls...

  • Page 50

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 50 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX21.5 (Motor selection done) The PLC user program sends this signal to the drive to indicate successful motor selection. ...

  • Page 51

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 51 1.2.9 Signals from axis/spindle (digital drives) DB31, ... DBX92.1 (ramp-function generator disable active) The drive signals back to...

  • Page 52

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.2 NC/PLC interface signals - only 840D sl Basic Functions 52 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX94.1 (heat sink temperature prewarning) The temperature of the heat sink in the power unit is outside the permissible ra...

  • Page 53

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 53 DB31, ... DBX94.4 (|nact| < nmin) The actual speed value nact is less than nmin (speed threshold value 3, p2161). DB31, ... DBX94.5 (|nact| < nx) The actu...

  • Page 54

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 54 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Foreground language MD9003 $MM_FIRST_LANGUAGE (foreground language) In the case of SINUMERIK 840D sl, two languages are available simultaneously. The foreground la...

  • Page 55

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 55 1.3.2 Settings for involute interpolation - only 840D sl Introduction The involute of the circle is a curve traced out from the end point on a "piece of string&...

  • Page 56

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 56 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Accuracy If the programmed end point does not lie exactly on the involute defined by the starting point, interpolation takes place between the two involutes defined ...

  • Page 57

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 57 Limit angle If AR is used to program an involute leading to the base circle with an angle of rotation that is greater than the maximum possible value, an alarm is ou...

  • Page 58

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 58 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Dynamic response Involutes that begin or end on the base circle have an infinite curvature at this point. To ensure that the velocity is adequately limited at this p...

  • Page 59

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 59 Access from NC System variables are available in the NC for fast access to PLC variables from a part program or synchronized action. The data is read/written directl...

  • Page 60

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 60 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● The user's programming engineer is responsible for coordinating access operations to the communications buffer from different channels. ● Data consistency can ...

  • Page 61

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 61 Example A variable of type WORD is to be transferred from the PLC to the NC. The position offset within the NC input (PLC output area) should be the fourth byte. The...

  • Page 62

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 62 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1.3.5 Access protection via password and keyswitch Access authorization Access to functions, programs and data is useroriented and controlled via 8 hierarchical prot...

  • Page 63

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 63 Access features ● Protection level 0 provides the greatest number of access rights, protection level 7 the least. ● If certain access rights are granted to a pro...

  • Page 64

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 64 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Maximum number of characters A password may contain up to eight characters. We recommend that you confine yourself to the characters available on the operator panel ...

  • Page 65

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 65 Switch positions Switch position 0 has the most restricted access rights. Switch position 3 has the least restricted access rights. DB10, DBX56.4 / .5 / .6 / .7 (swi...

  • Page 66

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 66 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1.3.6 "Parking" of a machine axis In the "Parking" state, a machine axis can be moved mechanically or maintenance performed (e.g. encoder replace...

  • Page 67

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 67 1.3.7 Switchover of motor/drive data sets 1.3.7.1 General Information Behavior as of SW 4.5 SP1 Up to and including SW 4.5, the format of the interfaces for the moto...

  • Page 68

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 68 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1.3.7.2 Validity and format of the request/display interfaces Validity As soon as the control has received all the required information from the drive and has been e...

  • Page 69

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 69 Formatting The formatting of the interface, i.e. which bits are available for the motor data set index and which for the drive data set index is displayed via: DB31,...

  • Page 70

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.3 Functions Basic Functions 70 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Interfaces of the motor data sets (MDS) Relevant bit positions of the request and display interfaces: ● DB31, ... DBX21.1 / DBX93.1 – DB31, ... DBX21.1 / DBX93.1...

  • Page 71

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.4 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 71 1.3.7.7 Supplementary conditions Variable number of drive data sets for the "last" motor data set The "last" motor data set is the motor data set ...

  • Page 72

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.4 Examples Basic Functions 72 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameter-set-dependent machine data Parameter-set-dependent machine data are set as follows: Machine data Comment MD32200 $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN [0, AX1] = 4.0 Servo gain...

  • Page 73

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.5 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 73 1.5 Data lists 1.5.1 Machine data 1.5.1.1 Display machine data Number SINUMERIK Operate Identifier: $MM_ Description 9000 LCD_CONTRAST Contrast 9001 DISPLAY_TYPE M...

  • Page 74

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.5 Data lists Basic Functions 74 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1.5.1.4 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 30350 SIMU_AX_VDI_OUTPUT Output of axis signals for simulation axes 33050 LUBRICATION...

  • Page 75

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.5 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 75 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D HMI1-CPU at OPI Ready DB10.DBX108.3 DB2700.DBX2.3 Drives in cyclic operation DB10.DBX108.5 DB2700.DBX2.5 Drives ready D...

  • Page 76

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.5 Data lists Basic Functions 76 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D FC9 Out: Done DB19.DBX45.1 - FC9 Out: Error DB19.DBX45.2 - FC9 Out: StartErr DB19.DBX45.3 - 1.5.3.5 Signals to channel ...

  • Page 77

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.5 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 77 1.5.3.8 Signals from axis/spindle Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Referenced/synchronized, encoder 1/2 DB31, ... .DBX60.4/5 DB390x.DBX0.4/5 Traversing...

  • Page 78

    A2: Various NC/PLC interface signals and functions 1.5 Data lists Basic Functions 78 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 79

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 79 A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 22.1 Brief description 2.1.1 Axis monitoring functions Comprehensive monitoring functions are present in the controller for protection of people and machines: ● Contour monitoring ● Posit...

  • Page 80

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 80 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 2.2 Axis monitoring functions 2.2.1 Contour monitoring 2.2.1.1 Contour error Contour errors are caused by signal distortions in the position control loop. Sign...

  • Page 81

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 81 2.2.1.2 Following-error monitoring Function In control engineering terms, traversing along a machine axis always produces a certain following error, i.e. a diff...

  • Page 82

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 82 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 2-1 Following-error monitoring Effectiveness The following-error monitoring only operates with active position control and the following axis types: ● L...

  • Page 83

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 83 2.2.2 Positioning, zero speed and clamping monitoring 2.2.2.1 Correlation between positioning, zero-speed and clamping monitoring Overview The following overview ...

  • Page 84

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 84 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) MD36020 $MA_POSITIONING_TIME (delay time exact stop fine) After reaching "Exact stop fine", the positi...

  • Page 85

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 85 2.2.2.3 Zero-speed monitoring Function At the end of a positioning operation: ● Set velocity = 0 AND ● DB31, ... DBX64.6/7 (motion command minus/plus) = 0 c...

  • Page 86

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 86 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 the positioning tolerances: ● MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse) ● MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) ● MD36030 $MA_STANDSTILL_POS...

  • Page 87

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 87 Parameterization: MD36052 $MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING = 'H01' (special function for clamped axis) Note The NC detects whether an axis is clamped based on the "s...

  • Page 88

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 88 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The part program blocks N310 and N410 refer to the following programming example: Program code Comment N100 G0 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 G90 G54 F500 N101 G641 ADIS=.1 ADISP...

  • Page 89

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 89 Figure 2-3 Release axis clamp if MD36052 $MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING = 'H03' Automatic stop to set the clamping If an axis is to be clamped in continuous-path mode, the...

  • Page 90

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 90 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● The axis is clamped if the feedrate override of a machining block is not equal to 0. If the axis is clamped before the next machining block, i.e. the feedrate...

  • Page 91

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 91 Supplementary conditions Continuous-path mode For the above-mentioned functions: ● Automatic stop to release the clamping ● Optimized release of the axis clam...

  • Page 92

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 92 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● MD36052 $MA_STOP_ON_CLAMPING = 'H04' Generates a stop irrespective of M83 which is executed as a function of "feedrate override 0%". The axis is thu...

  • Page 93

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 93 2.2.3 Speed-setpoint monitoring Function The speed setpoint comprises: ● Speed setpoint of the position controller ● Speed setpoint portion of the feedforwar...

  • Page 94

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 94 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Speed-setpoint monitoring delay To prevent an error reaction from occurring in every speed-limitation instance, a delay time can be configured: MD36220 $MA_CTRLOU...

  • Page 95

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 95 Activation The actual-velocity monitoring is activated as soon as the active measuring system returns valid actual values (encoder limit frequency not exceeded). ...

  • Page 96

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 96 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Value Meaning Monitoring of HW faults: ON If a hardware fault is detected in the active measuring system, POWER ON alarm 25000 is displayed: "Axis <Axis...

  • Page 97

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 97 Monitoring functions in the NCK ● Encoder-limit-frequency monitoring ● Plausibility check for absolute encoders 2.2.5.1 Encoder-limit-frequency monitoring Fun...

  • Page 98

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 98 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The affected axis is stopped via the configured braking ramp in follow-up mode: MD36610 $MA_AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME (maximum time for braking ramp when an error oc...

  • Page 99

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 99 Zero mark diagnostics With absolute encoders, the permissible deviation must be determined for the plausibility check during commissioning. This can be performe...

  • Page 100

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 100 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Alarm 25021 If the plausibility check is tripped in the passive measuring system, alarm 25021 is displayed: "Axis <Axis name> Zero-mark monitoring pas...

  • Page 101

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 101 Effectiveness Customized monitoring can be activated in parallel to or as an alternative to standard zero-mark monitoring, depending on the setting in machine da...

  • Page 102

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 102 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variables You can implement customized error reactions using the following system variables: System variable Meaning $VA_ENC_ZERO_MON_ERR_CNT[<n>,&...

  • Page 103

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 103 2.2.6 Limit-switch monitoring Overview of the end stops and possible limit-switch monitoring: 2.2.6.1 Hardware limit switch Function A hardware limit switch ...

  • Page 104

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 104 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Effectiveness The hardware limit-switch monitoring is active after the controller has ramped up in all modes. Effect Upon reaching the hardware limit switch, the...

  • Page 105

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 105 ● PRESET After use of the function PRESET, the software limit-switch monitoring is no longer active. The machine must first be re-referenced. ● Endlessly rot...

  • Page 106

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 106 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 General ● Changing of the software limit switch (1st ↔ 2nd software limit switch) If the actual position of the machine axis after changing lies behind the s...

  • Page 107

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 107 Reference point at the tool Taking into account the tool data (tool length and tool radius) and therefore the reference point at the tool when monitoring the wor...

  • Page 108

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 108 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Manual operating modes ● JOG with / without transformation The axis is positioned at the working area limitation and then stopped. Powerup response If an axis ...

  • Page 109

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 109 Programmed working area limitation The programming is done using the G commands: G25 X… Y… Z… lower working area limitation G26 X… Y… Z… upper wo...

  • Page 110

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 110 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programmed working area limitation Activation or deactivation of the overall "working area limitation in the BCS" is arranged via part program commands...

  • Page 111

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 111 Working area limitation group In order that the axis-specific working area limits do not have to be rewritten for all channel axes when switching axis assignme...

  • Page 112

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions 112 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation of working area limits The working area limits of a working area limitation group are activated in the part program or synchronized action with the co...

  • Page 113

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.2 Axis monitoring functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 113 Behavior in JOG mode Initial situation: ● In the JOG mode, several geometry axes traverse simultaneously (e.g. using several handwheels) ● A rotating frame i...

  • Page 114

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 114 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machine axis without measuring system For a machine axis without a measuring system (speed-controlled spindle), then a state corresponding to "parking" is activ...

  • Page 115

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 115 Coordinate system The definition of a protection zone takes place with reference to the geometric axis of a channel in the basic coordinate system. Reference ● Tool-rel...

  • Page 116

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 116 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example: Doubleslide turning machine ● The toolrelated protection zones are assigned to channel 1 or 2. ● The workpiecerelated protection zones are assigned to the ma...

  • Page 117

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 117 Figure 2-9 Example of a milling machine Figure 2-10 Example of a turning machine with relative protection zone for tailstock

  • Page 118

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 118 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 2.3.3 Definition via part program instruction General A protection-zone definition must contain the following information: ● Protection zone type (workpiece- or tool-...

  • Page 119

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 119 Parameters Type Description Type of limitation in the third dimension 0 No limitation 1 Limit in plus direction 2 Limit in minus direction applim INT 3 Limit in positive ...

  • Page 120

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 120 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Toolrelated protection zones must be convex. If a concave protection zone is required, the protection zone must be divided up into several convex protection zones. Figur...

  • Page 121

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 121 ● End of program (M17, M30) ● M functions: M0, M1, M2 Programmable frames (TRANS, ROT, SCALE, MIRROR) and configurable frames (G54 to G57) are ineffective. Inch/metri...

  • Page 122

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 122 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variable Type Meaning Protection zone type 0 Workpiece-related protection zone 1 Reserved 2 Reserved $SN_PA_T_W[n] $SC_PA_T_W[n] INT 3 Tool-related protection zone...

  • Page 123

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 123 Data of the protection zone definitions Data storage The protection zone definitions are stored in the following files: File Blocks _N_NCK_PRO Data block for NC-specif...

  • Page 124

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 124 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameters Type Description <n>: INT Protection area number Activation status 0 Deactivated 1 Preactivated 2 Activated <state>: INT 3 Preactivated with condi...

  • Page 125

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 125 Automatic activation after the NC powers up Protection zones that are to take effect immediately after the NC powers up can be specified via the following system variable...

  • Page 126

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 126 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Preactivation with conditional stop NOTICE Protection zone violation possible If a preactivated protection zone with conditional stop is not activated in good time, the...

  • Page 127

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 127 Automatic deactivation via machine data parameterization When executing the Geometry axis change and Transformation change functions, the active protection zones can be d...

  • Page 128

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 128 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Memory requirements The memory required for protection zones is parameterized via the following machine data: ● Persistent memory – MD18190 $MN_MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NC...

  • Page 129

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 129 Behavior in the AUTOMATIC and MDA modes In AUTOMATIC and MDA mode, no traversing motion is enabled into or through active protection zones: ● A traversing motion that w...

  • Page 130

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 130 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 After the end of the traversing motion, the alarm is cleared automatically. If the current position is within an activated or preactivated protection zone, the following ...

  • Page 131

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 131 The resulting maximum traversing range at the start time does not take protection zone 3 into account. Therefore, a protection zone violation in protection zone 3 is poss...

  • Page 132

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 132 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Behavior at change of operating mode The protection zones temporarily enabled in JOG mode are retained after a change to AUTOMATIC or MDA mode. The temporary enables set ...

  • Page 133

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 133 Positioning axes For positioning axes, only the programmed block end point is monitored. An alarm is displayed during the traversing motion of the positioning axes: Alarm...

  • Page 134

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 134 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Meaning Test for limit violations with regard to the geometry axes. Preprocessing stop: No CALCPOSI: Alone in the block: Yes Function return value. Negative values indic...

  • Page 135

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 135 Hundreds digit AND units digit == 1 or 2: The positive limit value has been violated. 1xx AND units digit == 3 1): An NC-specific protection zone has been violated. AND ...

  • Page 136

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 136 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Case 1: Formation of vector v for <TestID>, bit 4 == 1 The input vectors <Dist> and <MaxDist> span the motion plane. This plane is cut by the violated l...

  • Page 137

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 137 With <TestID>, bit 4 == 1: <Dist> and <MaxDist> <MaxDist> and <Dist> must contain vectors as input values that span a motion plane. The two ...

  • Page 138

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 138 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example In the example (see figure), the active software limit switches and working area limits in the X-Y plane and the following three protection zones are displayed ...

  • Page 139

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 139 Program code N120 CPROTDEF(4, FALSE, 0) N130 G17 G1 X0 Y15 N140 X10 N150 Y25 N160 X0 N170 Y15 N180 EXECUTE(_SB) ; Machine-related protection zone N3 N190 NPROTDEF(3, FAL...

  • Page 140

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 140 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code N600 _MOVDIST[2] = 0. N610 _DLIMIT[3] = 2. N620 _STATUS = CALCPOSI(_STARTPOS, _MOVDIST, _DLIMIT, _MAXDIST,,12) N630 _STARTPOS[0] = 0. N640 _STARTPOS[1] = 0. ...

  • Page 141

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 141 Supplementary conditions Axis status All machine axes considered by CALCPOSI() must be homed. Circle-related distance specifications All circle-related distance specifica...

  • Page 142

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.3 Protection zones Basic Functions 142 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Protection zone clearance and conventional protection zones With conventional protection zones, there is no guarantee that the safety clearance set in <Limit>[3] is...

  • Page 143

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.4 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 143 2.4 Supplementary conditions 2.4.1 Axis monitoring functions Settings For correct operation of the monitoring, the following settings must be made or checked, in ...

  • Page 144

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions 144 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterize the number of working area limitation groups Three working area limitation groups will be provided: MD28600 $MC_MM_NUM_WORKAREA_CS_GROUP = 3 Define the working area ...

  • Page 145

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 145 Working area limitation group 2 In the second working area limitation group the axes in the WCS coordinate system can be limited: ● X axis in the plus direction: 10 mm ● X ax...

  • Page 146

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions 146 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 2.5.2 Protection zones 2.5.2.1 Definition and activation of protection zones Requirement The following internal protection zones are to be defined for a turning machine: ● One...

  • Page 147

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 147 Protection zone definition in the part program Table 2- 1 Part program excerpt for protection zone definition: Program code Comment DEF INT AB G18 Definition of the working plan...

  • Page 148

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions 148 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_MINUS_LIM[0] 0 ; Value of the limitation in the negative direction in the 3rd dimension $SN_PA_CONT_NUM[0] 4 ; Number of valid contour element...

  • Page 149

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 149 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[0,2] 110 ; Endpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for spindle chuck, contour element 2 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[0,3] 0 ; End...

  • Page 150

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions 150 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[0,5] 0 ; Midpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for spindle chuck, contour element 5 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[0,6] 0 ; Midpo...

  • Page 151

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 151 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[0,2] 1 ; Contour type[i] : 1 = G1 for even ; Protection zone for workpiece, contour element 2 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[0,3] 1 ; Contour type[i...

  • Page 152

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions 152 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[0,5] 0 ; Endpoint of contour[i], ordinate value ; Protection zone for workpiece, contour element 5 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[0,6] 0 ; Endpoint ...

  • Page 153

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 153 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[0,8] 0 ; Endpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for workpiece, contour element 8 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[0,9] 0 ; Endpoint ...

  • Page 154

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.5 Examples Basic Functions 154 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[1.1] -190 ; Midpoint of contour[i], ordinate value ; Protection zone for toolholder, contour element 1 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[1.2] 0 ; Midpo...

  • Page 155

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.6 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 155 System variable Value Remark $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[1.4] 0 ; Midpoint of contour[i], abscissa value ; Protection zone for toolholder, contour element 4 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[1.5] 0 ; Midpoi...

  • Page 156

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.6 Data lists Basic Functions 156 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Protection zones Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10618 PROTAREA_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE Protection zone for switchover of geo axes 18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK Number of files ...

  • Page 157

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.6 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 157 Protection zones Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN (SRAM) Number of files for channelspecific protection zones 28210 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIV...

  • Page 158

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.6 Data lists Basic Functions 158 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW Encoder limit frequency for encoder resynchronization 36310 ENC_ZERO_MONITORING Zero-mark monitoring 36312 ENC_ABS_...

  • Page 159

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.6 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 159 2.6.3 Signals 2.6.3.1 Signals to channel Axis monitoring functions None Protection zones Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Enable protection zones DB21, ... .DBX1.1...

  • Page 160

    A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 2.6 Data lists Basic Functions 160 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Channelspecific protection zone 9 violated DB21, ... .DBX279.0 DB3300.DBX15.0 Channelspecific protection zone 10 violated DB21, ......

  • Page 161

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 161 B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 33.1 Brief Description Exact stop or exact stop mode In exact stop traversing mode, all axes involved in the traversing motion (except axes of modal traversing modes) are decelerate...

  • Page 162

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.1 Brief Description Basic Functions 162 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 This results in the following advantages: ● Improved surface quality and machining time by avoiding excitation of machine resonances. ● Constant profile o...

  • Page 163

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.1 Brief Description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 163 NC block compression When a workpiece design is completed with a CAD/CAM system, the CAD/CAM system generally also compiles the corresponding part program to ...

  • Page 164

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.2 Exact stop mode Basic Functions 164 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.2 Exact stop mode Exact stop or exact stop mode In exact stop traversing mode, all path axes and special axes involved in the traversing motion that are not t...

  • Page 165

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.2 Exact stop mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 165 Exact stop criteria "Exact stop coarse" and "Exact stop fine". The exact stop criteria "Exact stop coarse" and "Exact stop f...

  • Page 166

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.2 Exact stop mode Basic Functions 166 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation of an exact stop criterion An exact stop criterion is activated in the part program by programming the appropriate G command: G command Exact-stop c...

  • Page 167

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.2 Exact stop mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 167 Assignable specification of the active exact stop criterion The active exact stop criterion can be permanently specified for the part program commands of the fi...

  • Page 168

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 168 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Value Meaning 2 Stop at block transition: Same behavior as G602 (Exact stop window coarse). 3 Stop at block transition: Same behavior as G603 (Interpolator...

  • Page 169

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 169 Implicit exact stop In some cases, an exact stop needs to be generated in continuous-path mode to allow the execution of subsequent actions. In such sit...

  • Page 170

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 170 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.3.2 Velocity reduction according to overload factor Function The function lowers the path velocity in continuou-path mode until the non-tangential block ...

  • Page 171

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 171 Overload factor The overload factor restricts step changes in the machine axis velocity at block ends. To ensure that the velocity jump does not exceed th...

  • Page 172

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 172 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.3.3 Rounding Function The "Rounding" function adds intermediate blocks (positioning blocks) along a programmed contour (path axes) at non-conti...

  • Page 173

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 173 ● In N20, an axis that was previously a path axis traverses as a positioning axis for the first time ● Geometry axes traverse in N10 but not in N20 ●...

  • Page 174

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 174 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Impact on synchronization conditions The programmed blocks between which the rounding contour is added are shortened during rounding. The original programm...

  • Page 175

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 175 Scope of the path criterion ● ADIS or ADISPOS must be programmed. If the default is "zero", G641 behaves like G64. ● If only one of the block...

  • Page 176

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 176 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Continuous-path mode with rounding based on a path criterion (G641) can be deactivated by selecting: ● Modal exact stop (G60) ● Continuous-path mode G6...

  • Page 177

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 177 Differences between G642 - G643 With regard to their rounding behavior, commands G642 and G643 differ as follows: G642 G643 With G642, the rounding path i...

  • Page 178

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 178 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The units positions (E) define the behavior for G643, the tens positions (Z) the behavior for G642: Value E or Z Meaning 0 All axes: Rounding by maintaini...

  • Page 179

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 179 Profile for limit velocity The use of a velocity profile for rounding in compliance with defined tolerances is controlled via the hundreds position in MD20...

  • Page 180

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 180 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.3.3.3 Rounding with maximum possible axial dynamic response (G644) Function Maximizing the dynamic response of the axes is key to this type of continuo...

  • Page 181

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 181 Value Meaning 2xxx: Input the maximum possible frequencies of each axis in the rounding area using the machine data: MD32440 $MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY (smoothin...

  • Page 182

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 182 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Jerk limitation The smoothing of the velocity jump on each axis and thus the shape of the rounding path depends on whether an interpolation is performed ...

  • Page 183

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 183 ● Phase 1 During phase 1, each axis builds up its maximum acceleration. The jerk is constant and equal to the maximum possible jerk on the respective axi...

  • Page 184

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 184 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation/deactivation Continuous-path mode with rounding of tangential block transitions can be activated in any NC part program block by the modal com...

  • Page 185

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 185 3.3.3.5 Rounding and repositioning (REPOS) If the machining in the area of the rounding contour is interrupted, a REPOS operation cannot be used to positio...

  • Page 186

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 186 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.3.4 LookAhead 3.3.4.1 Standard functionality Function LookAhead is a function which is active in continuous-path mode (G64, G64x) and determines a fores...

  • Page 187

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 187 Mode of operation LookAhead carries out a block-specific analysis of velocity limits and specifies the required brake ramp profile based on this informatio...

  • Page 188

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 188 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization Number of blocks To achieve reliable axis traversal in continuous-path mode, the feedrate must be adapted over several blocks. The number ...

  • Page 189

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 189 Velocity profiles In addition to the fixed, plannable velocity limitations, LookAhead can also take account of the programmed velocity. This makes it possi...

  • Page 190

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 190 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 In this way, a reduction of the velocity continuing into the block in which it is programmed can be avoided. If velocity reductions across block boundaries...

  • Page 191

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 191 A combination of both procedures (determination of following block velocity and determination of override points) can be used to calculate the velocity pro...

  • Page 192

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 192 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Its use optimizes the continuous-path mode as follows: ● Symmetry between the acceleration and deceleration profiles ● Uniform acceleration process, ev...

  • Page 193

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 193 Activation/deactivation The function can be switched on or off independently for every dynamic response mode (see Section 209,"Dynamic response mode ...

  • Page 194

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.3 Continuous-path mode Basic Functions 194 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N10 DYNPOS ;Switch on the DYNPOS dynamic response mode. Standard LookAhead functionality is active in the DYNPOS dynamic response mode...

  • Page 195

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 195 Using the commands of G function group 15 (feed types) It is not advisable to use the following feed types when the "Free-form surface mode: Extension ...

  • Page 196

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 196 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If a short acceleration takes place during a machining function with high path velocity, and is thus followed almost immediately by braking, the reduction i...

  • Page 197

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 197 Activation/deactivation The "smoothing of the path velocity" function is activated/deactivated with the machine data: MD20460 $MC_LOOKAH_SMOOTH_FA...

  • Page 198

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 198 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Axis-specific limit frequencies The axis-specific limit frequencies are defined via the machine data: MD32440 $MA_LOOKAH_FREQUENCY (smoothing frequency for ...

  • Page 199

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 199 If the time t2 - t1 is greater than 200 ms or if the additional program execution time t3 - t2 is more than 10% (= MD20460) of t2 - t1, the following time c...

  • Page 200

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 200 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.4.2 Adaptation of the dynamic path response Function Highly dynamic acceleration and deceleration processes during machining can cause excitation of mec...

  • Page 201

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 201 Activation/deactivation The function is activated/deactivated with the machine data: MD20465 $MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC (adaptation of the dynamic path response...

  • Page 202

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 202 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Mode of operation During processing and via all the axes involved in the path, the controller cyclically establishes the minimum of all the limit frequencie...

  • Page 203

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 203 If only axes AX1 and/or AX3 are involved in path motions, all deceleration and acceleration processes that would last less than TAX1 = TAX3 are adapted. The...

  • Page 204

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 204 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.4.3 Determination of the dynamic response limiting values In addition to determining the natural frequency of the path axes for assigning parameters to th...

  • Page 205

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 205 3.4.4 Interaction between the "smoothing of the path velocity" and "adaptation of the path dynamic response" functions The following exa...

  • Page 206

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 206 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 3-12 Path velocity profile with smoothing of the path velocity and adaptation of dynamic path response Effects of smoothing on path velocity: Inter...

  • Page 207

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 207 Example 2 Acceleration mode: SOFT The path involves the 3 axes X = AX1, Y = AX2, Z = AX3. The following parameters are assumed: MD20465 $MC_ADAPT_PATH_DYNA...

  • Page 208

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 208 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 This results in a path velocity profile with adaptation of the dynamic path response and with minimum, and thus virtually deactivated, smoothing of the path...

  • Page 209

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 209 3.4.5 Dynamic response mode for path interpolation Function Technology-specific, dynamic response settings can be saved in machine data and can be activated...

  • Page 210

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 210 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization Axial machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description Axis-specific dynamic response settings MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL[<n>] Axis accele...

  • Page 211

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 211 Suppressing G commands It is recommended that G commands from G function group 59 (dynamic response mode for path interpolation) which are not intended for ...

  • Page 212

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 212 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Needless deceleration and acceleration processes can trigger machine vibrations which result in unwanted marks on the workpiece. There are various optio...

  • Page 213

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 213 Activation/deactivation The function can be switched on or off independently for every dynamic response mode (see Section 209,"Dynamic response mode f...

  • Page 214

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.4 Dynamic adaptations Basic Functions 214 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The contour sampling factor is set with the machine data: MD10682 $MN_CONTOUR_SAMPLING_FACTOR The effective contour sampling time is calculated as follows...

  • Page 215

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.5 Compressor functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 215 3.5 Compressor functions 3.5.1 NC block compression Function COMPON, COMPCURV The compressor functions COMPON and COMPCURV generate one polynomial block ...

  • Page 216

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.5 Compressor functions Basic Functions 216 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Orientation transformation (TRAORI) When orientation transformation (TRAORI) is active, and under certain conditions, the compressor functions COMPON, COMP...

  • Page 217

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.5 Compressor functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 217 Axial machine data Number Identifier $MA_ Meaning MD33100 COMPRESS_POS_TOL Maximum permissible path deviation with compression Recommended settings for re...

  • Page 218

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.5 Compressor functions Basic Functions 218 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Deactivation All compressor functions are deactivated using the COMPOF command. References The programming of the compressor functions is described in: Pro...

  • Page 219

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.5 Compressor functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 219 Activation The "Combine short spline blocks" function can be activated for the following spline types: ● BSPLINE ● BSPLINE/ORICURVE ● CSPLI...

  • Page 220

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.6 Contour/Orientation tolerance Basic Functions 220 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N80 X0.001 Y0.001 Z0.001 ... N1000 M30 3.6 Contour/Orientation tolerance Parameterization for the contour/orientation toleran...

  • Page 221

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.6 Contour/Orientation tolerance Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 221 Programming the contour/orientation tolerance The machine and setting data described here take effect when the program is started and determin...

  • Page 222

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.6 Contour/Orientation tolerance Basic Functions 222 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Read tolerance values For more advanced applications or for diagnostics, the currently valid tolerances for the compressor functions (COMPON, COMP...

  • Page 223

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.7 Tolerance and compression of G0 blocks Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 223 ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $P_CTOL Programmed contour tolerance $P_OTOL Programmed o...

  • Page 224

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.7 Tolerance and compression of G0 blocks Basic Functions 224 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Configuration G0 tolerance factor The G0 tolerance factor is set channel-specific with the machine data: MD20560 $MC_G0_TOLERANCE_FACTOR ...

  • Page 225

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.7 Tolerance and compression of G0 blocks Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 225 Program code Comment CTOL=0.02 STOLF=4 G1 X... Y... Z... ; A contour tolerance of 0.02 mm is applied starting from here. X... Y... Z....

  • Page 226

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.8 RESET behavior Basic Functions 226 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3.8 RESET behavior MD20150 The channel-specific initial state is activated via a RESET for G function groups: MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (initial setting of ...

  • Page 227

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.10 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 227 Effects If a block change cannot be executed in continuous path mode, all axes programmed in this part program block (except cross-block traversing special axes) ar...

  • Page 228

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.10 Data lists Basic Functions 228 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20465 ADAPT_PATH_DYNAMIC Adaptation of path dynamic response 20480 SMOOTHING_MODE Rounding behavior with G64x 20482 COMPRESSOR_M...

  • Page 229

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.10 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 229 3.10.2 Setting data 3.10.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42465 SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL Max. contour deviation during rounding 42466 ...

  • Page 230

    B1: Continuous-path mode, Exact stop, Look Ahead 3.10 Data lists Basic Functions 230 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 231

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 231 B2: Acceleration 44.1 Brief description 4.1.1 General Scope of functions The Description of Functions covers the following sub-functions: ● Acceleration ● Jerk ● Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic Acceleration and jerk T...

  • Page 232

    B2: Acceleration 4.1 Brief description Basic Functions 232 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Channel-specific functions: ● Acceleration profile that can be selected via part-program instruction: Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK) ● Programmable constant travel time for...

  • Page 233

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 233 4.2 Functions 4.2.1 Acceleration without jerk limitation (BRISK/BRISKA) (channel/axis-specific) 4.2.1.1 General Information General Information In the case of acceleration without jerk limitation (j...

  • Page 234

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 234 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following features of the acceleration profile can be identified from the figure above: ● Time: t0 Sudden acceleration from 0 to +amax ● Interval: t0 - t1 Constant acceleration with +amax; l...

  • Page 235

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 235 Maximum axial acceleration for positioning axis motions With positioning axis motions, one of the two following maximum values is effective depending on the set positioning axis dynamic response mod...

  • Page 236

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 236 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Supplementary conditions If the acceleration profile is changed in a part program during machining (BRISK/SOFT) an exact stop is performed at the end of the block. Single-axis acceleration without j...

  • Page 237

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 237 4.2.2 Constant travel time (channel-specific) 4.2.2.1 General Information Overview In the case of acceleration without jerk limitation, sudden acceleration of 2 * amax occurs on switchover between a...

  • Page 238

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 238 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The effect of the constant travel time can be seen from the figure above: ● Time: t1 End of acceleration phase with sudden acceleration 1 * amax ● Interval: t1 - t2 Acceleration 0; constant velo...

  • Page 239

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 239 Functionality The ACC part-program command is used to adjust the maximum acceleration value of a machine axis. Axis: ● Value range: Axis name for the channel's machine axes Adjustment factor: ● ...

  • Page 240

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 240 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4.2.5 Path-acceleration limitation (channel-specific) 4.2.5.1 General Information General Information To enable a flexible response to the machining situations concerned, setting data can be used to...

  • Page 241

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 241 Syntax $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL = value Functionality The path-acceleration limitation can be activated/deactivated by programming the setting data. Parameter: Value ● Value range: TRUE, FALSE App...

  • Page 242

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 242 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Effectiveness Effective Real-time event acceleration is only enabled in AUTOMATIC and MDA operating modes in conjunction with the following real-time events: • NC Stop / NC Start • Override cha...

  • Page 243

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 243 4.2.7 Acceleration with programmed rapid traverse (G00) (axis-specific) 4.2.7.1 General Information Frequently, the acceleration for the machine axes involved in the machining process must be set lo...

  • Page 244

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 244 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The maximum value for acceleration with active jerk limitation is parameterized using a factor calculated in relation to the axis-specific maximum value. This is used to generate the maximum value f...

  • Page 245

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 245 4.2.10 Acceleration margin for radial acceleration (channel-specific) 4.2.10.1 General Information Overview In addition to the path acceleration (tangential acceleration), radial acceleration also h...

  • Page 246

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 246 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example The following machine parameters apply: ● MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL for all geometry axes: 3 m/s ● Maximum path velocity with a path radius of 10 mm due to mechanical constraints of the m...

  • Page 247

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 247 Advantages Minimal load on the machine's mechanical components and low risk of high-frequency and difficult-to-control mechanical vibrations thanks to constant excessive acceleration. Disadvantages ...

  • Page 248

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 248 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Interval: t2 - t3 Constant jerk with -rmax; linear decrease in acceleration; quadratic decrease in excessive velocity until maximum value +vmax is reached ● Interval: t3 - t4 Constant jerk wit...

  • Page 249

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 249 4.2.11.3 Programming Syntax SOFT Functionality The SOFT part-program instruction is used to select the acceleration profile with jerk limitation for the traversing operations of geometry axes in th...

  • Page 250

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 250 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The machine data to be used is determined by the set positioning axis dynamic response mode: MD18960 $MN_POS_DYN_MODE = <mode> <mode> Meaning The following is effective as maximum axi...

  • Page 251

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 251 4.2.13 Path-jerk limitation (channel-specific) 4.2.13.1 General Information Overview To enable a flexible response to the machining situations concerned, setting data can be used to limit the path j...

  • Page 252

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 252 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Switch ON/OFF Syntax $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK = value Functionality The path-jerk limitation can be activated/deactivated by programming the setting data. Parameter: Value ● Value range: TRUE, FALS...

  • Page 253

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 253 Effectiveness Effective Path jerk for real-time events is only enabled in AUTOMATIC and MDA operating modes in conjunction with the following real-time events: • NC Stop / NC Start • Override c...

  • Page 254

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 254 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Reset behavior The function is deactivated on reset. Boundary conditions Programming $AC_PATHJERK in the part program automatically triggers a preprocessing stop with REORG (STOPRE). 4.2.15 Jerk w...

  • Page 255

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 255 4.2.16 Excessive jerk for block transitions without constant curvature (axis-specific) 4.2.16.1 General Information Overview In the case of block transitions without constant curvature (e.g. straigh...

  • Page 256

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 256 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Availability The "velocity-dependent jerk adaptation" function is available independent of the function " 211,Free-form surface mode: Basic 211,functions (Pa 211,ge 211)". Param...

  • Page 257

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 257 v0: MD32437 $MA_AX_JERK_VEL0 v1: MD32438 $MA_AX_JERK_VEL1 j0: MD32431 $MA_MAX_AX_JERK j1: MD32439 $MA_MAX_AX_JERK_FACTOR * MD32431 $MA_MAX_AX_JERK Figure 4-5 Axial jerk as a function of the axis ve...

  • Page 258

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 258 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4.2.18 Jerk filter (axis-specific) 4.2.18.1 General Information Overview In certain application scenarios, e.g. when milling free-form surfaces, it may be beneficial to smooth the position setpoint ...

  • Page 259

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 259 Mode: Bandstop filter The bandstop filter is a 2nd-order filter in terms of numerator and denominator: where: fZ: Numerator natural freq. fN: Denominator natural freq. DZ: Numerator damping DN: Den...

  • Page 260

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 260 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Supplementary conditions If too high a numerator natural frequency is selected, the filter is disabled. In this case the limiting frequency fZmax depends on the position-control cycle: 4.2.18.2 Par...

  • Page 261

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 261 4.2.19 Kneeshaped acceleration characteristic curve 4.2.19.1 Adaptation to the motor characteristic curve Function Various types of motor, particularly stepper motors, have a torque characteristic t...

  • Page 262

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 262 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following figures show typical velocity and acceleration characteristic curves for the respective types of characteristic: Constant characteristic Figure 4-7 Acceleration and velocity characte...

  • Page 263

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 263 The key data for the characteristic curves equate to: vmax = $MA_MAX_AX_VELO vred = $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT * $MA_MAX_AX_VELO amax = $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL ared = (1 - $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR)...

  • Page 264

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 264 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4.2.19.3 Substitute characteristic curve Function If the programmed path cannot be traversed using the parameterized acceleration characteristic curve (e.g., active kinematic transformation), a subs...

  • Page 265

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 265 Substitute characteristic curve with curved path sections In the case of curved path sections, normal and tangential acceleration are considered together. The path velocity is reduced so that only u...

  • Page 266

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 266 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1: Brake application point 2: Torque decrease zone 3: Maximum torque zone vred: Creep velocity vmax: Maximum velocity Nxy: Part program block with block number Nxy Figure 4-12 Deceleration with Loo...

  • Page 267

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 267 4.2.19.5 Programming Channel-specific activation (DRIVE) Syntax DRIVE Functionality The knee-shaped characteristic curve is activated for path acceleration using the DRIVE part-program instruction....

  • Page 268

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 268 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Reset behavior The channel-specific default setting is activated via a reset: MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] Dependencies If the knee-shaped acceleration characteristic curve is parameterized...

  • Page 269

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 269 4.2.20 Acceleration and jerk for JOG motions In order to avoid unwanted machine motions in JOG mode, separate axial acceleration and jerk limit values can be specified for JOG motion. It is also pos...

  • Page 270

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions 270 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 With MD21166 = 0, the axis-specific limit value from MD32301 $MA_JOG_MAX_ACCEL is effective instead of the channel-specific acceleration limitation. Note With MD21166 $MC_JOG_ACCEL_GEO [<geomet...

  • Page 271

    B2: Acceleration 4.2 Functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 271 4.2.20.2 Supplementary conditions Path override / overlaid motion With path override / overlaid motion (e.g. DRF), the JOG-specific maximum values for acceleration and jerk (MD32301 $MA_JOG_MAX_ACCE...

  • Page 272

    B2: Acceleration 4.3 Examples Basic Functions 272 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 As with SOFTA, the part program instructions BRISKA and DRIVEA are also effective in JOG mode, i.e. the acceleration is without jerk limitation, even when MD32420 $MA_JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE is set t...

  • Page 273

    B2: Acceleration 4.3 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 273 Acceleration profile: BRISK 1: Accelerate to 100% of path velocity (F10000) in accordance with acceleration default: ACC (N2200...) 2: Brake to 10% of path velocity as a result of override modific...

  • Page 274

    B2: Acceleration 4.3 Examples Basic Functions 274 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4.3.2 Jerk 4.3.2.1 Path velocity characteristic Key statement An excerpt from a part program is provided below, together with the associated acceleration characteristic, by way of an example. These a...

  • Page 275

    B2: Acceleration 4.3 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 275 Acceleration profile: SOFT 1: Jerk according to $MA_MAX_AX_JERK[..] 2: Jerk according to $AC_PATHJERK 3: Jerk according to $MA_MAX_AX_JERK[..] (approach block end velocity) 4: Velocity limit due to...

  • Page 276

    B2: Acceleration 4.3 Examples Basic Functions 276 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 4-15 Part program contour Figure 4-16 X axis: Velocity and acceleration characteristic

  • Page 277

    B2: Acceleration 4.3 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 277 4.3.4 Knee-shaped acceleration characteristic curve 4.3.4.1 Activation Key statement The example given illustrates how the knee-shaped acceleration characteristic curve is activated on the basis of: ...

  • Page 278

    B2: Acceleration 4.4 Data lists Basic Functions 278 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Part program (excerpt) Program code Comment N10 G1 X100 Y50 Z50 F700 ; Path motion (X,Y, Z) with DRIVE N15 Z20 ; Path motion (Z) with DRIVE N20 BRISK ; Switchover to BRISK N25 G1 X120 Y70 ; Path ...

  • Page 279

    B2: Acceleration 4.4 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 279 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 21159 JOG_JERK_ORI_ENABLE Initial setting of the channel-specific jerk limitation of orientation axes for traversing in JOG mode 21166 JOG_ACCEL_GEO Maximum acc...

  • Page 280

    B2: Acceleration 4.4 Data lists Basic Functions 280 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4.4.2 Setting data 4.4.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42500 SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL Max. path acceleration 42502 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL Analysis of SD 42500: ON/OFF ...

  • Page 281

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 281 F1: Travel to fixed stop 55.1 Brief description Function With the "Travel to fixed stop" function, moving machine parts, e.g. tailstock or sleeve, can be traversed with a defined torque against other machine parts. Cha...

  • Page 282

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 282 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The activation can also be performed without traversing motion of the relevant axis. The torque is immediately limited. The fixed stop is monitored as soon as the axis is traverse...

  • Page 283

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 283 Axis name Instead of a machine axis name, the names of geometry or special axes can be used if they are assigned precisely to a machine axis and one of the following functions is ...

  • Page 284

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 284 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Boundary conditions ● The traversing motion to the fixed stop can be programmed as a path- or block-related or modal positioning axis motion. ● Travel to fixed stop can be be ...

  • Page 285

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 285 5.2.2 Functional sequence 5.2.2.1 Selection Figure 5-1 Example of travel to fixed stop Procedure The NC detects that the function "Travel to fixed stop" is selected v...

  • Page 286

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 286 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 5.2.2.2 Fixed stop is reached Procedure When the axis has reached the fixed stop, the torque in the drive is increased up to the programmed clamping torque. How the control dete...

  • Page 287

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 287 Monitoring window If no fixed stop monitoring window was programmed in the block or from program start, then the value set in the machine data: MD37020 $MA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW_DEF (...

  • Page 288

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 288 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 5.2.2.3 Fixed stop is not reached Procedure If the programmed end position is reached, without detecting the state "fixed stop reached", then depending on the state of...

  • Page 289

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 289 Figure 5-3 Fixed stop is not reached 5.2.2.4 Deselection Procedure With the deselection of the function FXS[<axis>]=0, a preprocessing stop (STOPRE) is triggered. The tor...

  • Page 290

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 290 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Response when pulse enable is canceled The pulse enable or pulse inhibit can be canceled via: ● Drive: Via terminal EP (enable pulses) ● NC/PLC interface signal: DB31, ... DBX...

  • Page 291

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 291 5.2.3 Behavior during block search Block search with calculation ● If the target block is located in a program section in which the axis must stop at a fixed limit, then the fix...

  • Page 292

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 292 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System variable The state of the function can be read via the following system variable: ● $AA_FXS (desired state) ● $VA_FXS (actual state) Value Description 0 Axis not at fi...

  • Page 293

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 293 Program code N100 WHEN ($AA_FXS[X]==3) AND ($VA_FXS[X]==0) DO FXS[X]=1 N200 WHEN ($AA_FXS[X]==0) AND ($VA_FXS[X]==1) DO FXS[X]=0 N1020 REPOSA Displaying the REPOS offset Once...

  • Page 294

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 294 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Deactivating FXS-REPOS FXS-REPOS is deactivated by: ● An FXS synchronized action which refers to REPOSA ● $AA_FXS[X] = $VA_FXS[X] in the SERUPRO_ASUB Note A SERUPRO ASUB wit...

  • Page 295

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 295 Function abort A function abort can be triggered by the following events: ● Emergency stop CAUTION Dangerous machine situations possible for travel to limit stop It must be en...

  • Page 296

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 296 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Vertical axes The "Travel to fixed stop" function can be used for vertical axes even when alarms are active. If a function-specific alarm occurs for a vertical axis wh...

  • Page 297

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 297 Monitoring window SD43520 $SA_FIXED_STOP_WINDOW (monitoring window) Default setting The defaults for the setting data are set via the following machine data: ● Clamping torque...

  • Page 298

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 298 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Application example for $AA_FXS In order that a block change is executed, no alarm should be triggered when a fault occurs. The cause can then be determined via the system variabl...

  • Page 299

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 299 Enabling the fixed stop alarms The following machine data can be use to set whether the fixed stop alarms ● Alarm 20091 "Fixed stop not reached", ● Alarm 20094 &quo...

  • Page 300

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 300 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Availability System Availability SINUMERIK 840D sl Standard (basic scope) SINUMERIK 828D Option Modal activation (FOCON/FOCOF) The activation of the function after POWER ON and...

  • Page 301

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 301 Block-related limit (FOC) The part program command FOC activates the torque limit for a block. An activation from a synchronized action takes effect up to the end of the current...

  • Page 302

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.2 Detailed description Basic Functions 302 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Restrictions The FOC function is subject to the following restrictions: ● The change of the torque/force limitation represented as an acceleration limitation is taken into accou...

  • Page 303

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.3 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 303 5.3 Examples Static synchronized actions Travel to limit stop (FXS) is initiated on request using an R parameter ($R1) in a static synchronized action. Program code Comment N10 IDS=1 WHENEVE...

  • Page 304

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.4 Data lists Basic Functions 304 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Block-related synchronized actions Travel to limit stop is activated above a specific position of the traversing motion of the following block Program code Comment N10 G0 G90 X0 ; Starting...

  • Page 305

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.4 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 305 5.4.2 Setting data 5.4.2.1 Axis/spindle-specific setting data Number Identifier: $SA_ Description 43500 FIXED_STOP_SWITCH Selection of travel to fixed stop 43510 FIXED_STOP_WINDOW Fixed st...

  • Page 306

    F1: Travel to fixed stop 5.4 Data lists Basic Functions 306 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 307

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 307 G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 66.1 Brief description The description of functions explains how to parameterize a machine axis in relation to: ● Actual-value/measuring systems ● Setpoint s...

  • Page 308

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions 308 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example: Interpolation cycle = 12 ms N10 G0 X0 Y0; [mm] N20 G0 X100 Y100; [mm] ⇒ Path length programmed in block...

  • Page 309

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 309 Range of values for feedrate for positioning axes: Metric system: Inch system: 0.001 ≤ FA ≤ 999,999.999 [mm...

  • Page 310

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions 310 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The traversing range for rotary axes can be limited via machine data. References: Function Manual, Extended Functi...

  • Page 311

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 311 6.2.4 Input/display resolution, computational resolution Resolutions: Differences Resolutions, e.g. resolutions of...

  • Page 312

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions 312 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example of rounding: Computational resolution: 1000 incr./mm Programmed path: 97.3786 mm Effective value: 97.379 m...

  • Page 313

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 313 Physical quantity: Input/output units for standard basic system: Metric Inch Compensation value linear position ...

  • Page 314

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions 314 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following applies: Selected input/output unit = MD10230 * internal unit In the machine data: MD10230 $MN_SCAL...

  • Page 315

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.2 Velocities, traversing ranges, accuracies Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 315 ⇒ The scaling factor for the linear velocities is to differ from the standard setting. For this in the machine ...

  • Page 316

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions 316 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system 6.3.1 Conversion of basic system by part program Programmable switchover in the measuring syst...

  • Page 317

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 317 Reading in part programs from external sources If part programs, including data sets (zero offsets, tool offsets, etc.), progra...

  • Page 318

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions 318 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N190 R2=1 ; N200 ENDIF ; N210 IF ( (R1+R2) = 1 ) ; ; Alarm if only one of the two conditions (N150, N18...

  • Page 319

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 319 Program code Comment N140 R1=1 ; N150 G71 Z10 F10 ; Z = 10 mm X = 10 mm N160 G70 Z10 F10 ; Z = 10 inch X = 10 mm N170 G71 Z10 ...

  • Page 320

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions 320 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Read position data in synchronized actions If a measuring system has not been explicitly programmed in the synchronized ...

  • Page 321

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 321 The change in the measuring system occurs only under the following supplementary conditions: ● MD10260 $MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SY...

  • Page 322

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions 322 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System data When changing over the measuring system, from the view of the user, all length-related specifications are convert...

  • Page 323

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 323 ● The system of units for sag compensation is configured using: MD32711 $MA_CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC References: Function ...

  • Page 324

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions 324 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Only with this identical setting for both measuring systems is it possible to change the measuring system without a significant...

  • Page 325

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 325 Archive and machine data sets are downwards compatible for a setting: MD11220 $MN_INI_FILE_MODE = 2 Note The INCH/METRIC oper...

  • Page 326

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions 326 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Special features of the feedrate weighting for rotary axes in FGROUP: Program code N100 FGROUP(X,Y,Z,A) N110 G1 G91 A10 F100...

  • Page 327

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.3 Metric/inch measuring system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 327 Program code Comment N240 DO $R6=$AC_TIME N250 X10 A10 ; Feedrate = 2540 mm/min, path = 254.2 mm, R6 = approx. 6 s N260 DO $R7...

  • Page 328

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 328 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Without preprocessing stop in the part program via system variables: $PA_FGROUP[<axis>] Returns the value "1&...

  • Page 329

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 329 Actual-value acquisition A maximum of two measuring systems can be connected for each axis/spindle, e.g. a direct measuring s...

  • Page 330

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 330 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If the axis is not referenced (at least in the current control measuring system), then the related monitoring is not active if ...

  • Page 331

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 331 6.4.2 Setpoint and encoder assignment Setpoint marshalling The following machine data are relevant for the setpoint assignment ...

  • Page 332

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 332 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Encoder assignment The following machine data are relevant for assigning the encoder information of the drive - transferred in ...

  • Page 333

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 333 MD30242 $MA_ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT[ n, axis ] Encoder is independent System Value Meaning 0 The encoder is not independent. 1 The ...

  • Page 334

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 334 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Machine data index [ n ] The machine data index [ n ] for encoder assignment has the following meaning: • n = 0: The ...

  • Page 335

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 335 Motor/load gear The motor/load gear supported by SINUMERIK is configured via the following machine data: MD31060 $MA_DRIVE_AX_R...

  • Page 336

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 336 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Encoder not directly at the tool The following supplementary conditions apply to a gear change of the intermediate gear in posi...

  • Page 337

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 337 If the position reference to the machine, tool, etc., has been lost, it must first be restored through appropriate adjustment o...

  • Page 338

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 338 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Manual comparison In the machine data: MD32250 $MA_RATED_OUTVAL a value not equal to zero is entered. Note Velocity adj...

  • Page 339

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 339 However, due to control processes, the axes should not reach their maximum velocity (MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO) at 100% of the sp...

  • Page 340

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 340 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machine data Linear axis Linear axis Rotary axis Linear scale/ or as direct measuring system Encoder on motor Encoder on mach...

  • Page 341

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 341 Parameter-set-dependent machine data Meaning MD31050 $MA_DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM[m] Denominator load gearbox MD31060 $MA_DRIVE_...

  • Page 342

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 342 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Relevant machine data for the actual-value resolution The actual-value resolution results from the design of the machine, wheth...

  • Page 343

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 343 6.4.6.2 Example: Linear axis with linear scale Figure 6-4 Linear axis with linear scale The ratio of the internal increments t...

  • Page 344

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 344 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The ratio of the internal increments to the encoder increments per mm is calculated as follows: Example Assumptions: ● Rotar...

  • Page 345

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 345 An encoder increment corresponds to 0.004768 internal increments or 209.731543 encoder increments correspond to an internal in...

  • Page 346

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 346 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 6.4.6.5 Example: Rotary axis with rotary encoder on motor Figure 6-7 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on motor The ratio of the...

  • Page 347

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 347 Example Assumptions: ● Rotary encoder on the motor: 2048 pulses/revolution ● Internal pulse multiplication: 2048 ● Gearbo...

  • Page 348

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions 348 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 6.4.6.6 Example: Rotary axis with rotary encoder on the machine Figure 6-8 Rotary axis with rotary encoder on the machine The ...

  • Page 349

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.4 Setpoint/actual-value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 349 6.4.6.7 Example: Intermediate gear with encoder on the tool Figure 6-9 Intermediate gear with encoder directly on the rotating...

  • Page 350

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.5 Closed-loop control Basic Functions 350 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 6.5 Closed-loop control 6.5.1 General Position control of an axis/spindle The closed-loop control of an axis consists of the current and...

  • Page 351

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.5 Closed-loop control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 351 Fine interpolation Using the fine interpolator (FIPO), the contour precision can be further increased by reducing the staircase effect ...

  • Page 352

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.5 Closed-loop control Basic Functions 352 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The function is activated via: MD32900 $MA_DYN_MATCH_ENABLE = 1 (dynamic response adaptation) The dynamic response adaptation is realiz...

  • Page 353

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.5 Closed-loop control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 353 Approximation formulas for the equivalent time constant of the position control loop of an axis The equivalent time constant Tequiv of t...

  • Page 354

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.5 Closed-loop control Basic Functions 354 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier $MA_ Meaning 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN Servo gain factor 32452 BACKLASH_FACTOR Backlash compensation 32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT Fe...

  • Page 355

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 355 6.6 Optimization of the control 6.6.1 Position controller, position setpoint filter: Balancing filter Function With feedforward ...

  • Page 356

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions 356 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Setting the equivalent time constant of the speed control loop (MD32810) We recommend that the axis be allowed to move in and ou...

  • Page 357

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 357 These can be reduced with the help of the position setpoint filter for dynamic response adaptation (MD32910 $MA_DYN_MATCH_TIME) ...

  • Page 358

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions 358 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Limitation to stiff machines Experience has shown that this expenditure is only worthwhile in the case of very stiff machines, a...

  • Page 359

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 359 Activation To activate the axial jerk filter setpoint, the following machine data must be set to "TRUE": MD32400 $MA_...

  • Page 360

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions 360 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Boundary conditions Filter times The jerk filter is only effective when the time constant (MD32410) is greater than one position...

  • Page 361

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 361 Parameterization The time constant for the axial phase filter setpoint (dead time / delay) is set in the machine data: MD32895 $...

  • Page 362

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions 362 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 6.6.4 Position controller: injection of positional deviation Preconditions ● The function can only be used on axes with two en...

  • Page 363

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 363 Activation/parameterization The function is activated by specifying the weighting factor: MD32950 $MA_POSCTRL_DAMPING (damping ...

  • Page 364

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions 364 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Procedure 1. First optimize the position control loop as a proportional-action controller using the tools described in the previ...

  • Page 365

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.6 Optimization of the control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 365 Example Setting result after several iterative processes for KR and Tn. Machine data settings: MD32220 $MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE...

  • Page 366

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.7 Data lists Basic Functions 366 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 6.7 Data lists 6.7.1 Machine data 6.7.1.1 Displaying machine data Number Identifier: $MM_ Description 9004 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION Display resolution...

  • Page 367

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.7 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 367 6.7.1.3 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES Initial setting of the G groups 6.7.1.4 Axis/s...

  • Page 368

    G2: Velocities, setpoint / actual value systems, closed-loop control 6.7 Data lists Basic Functions 368 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active 32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT Feedforward control factor for spe...

  • Page 369

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 369 H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 77.1 Brief description 7.1.1 Function Auxiliary functions permit activation of the system functions of the NCK and PLC user functions. Auxiliary functions can be programmed in: ● Part progra...

  • Page 370

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions 370 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Type Function Example Meaning M Additional function M2=3 2nd spindle: Spindle right S Spindle function S2=100 2nd spindle: Spindle speed = 100 (e.g. rpm) T Tool number ...

  • Page 371

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 371 7.1.3 Overview of the auxiliary functions M functions M (special function) Address extension Value Range of values Meaning Range of values Type Meaning Number 8) 0 (...

  • Page 372

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions 372 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● The predefined auxiliary functions M0, M1, M17, M30, M6, M4, M5 cannot be redefined. ● M function-specific machine data: MD10800 $MN_EXTERN_CHAN_SYNC_M_NO_MIN MD10...

  • Page 373

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 373 H functions H (aux. function) Address extension Value Range of values Meaning Range of values Type Meaning Number 8) - 2147483648 ... + 2147483647 INT 0 ... 99 Any 0...

  • Page 374

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions 374 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Further information ● Identification of the tools, optionally via tool number or location number (see Section 1389,"W1: 1389,Tool offset (P 1389,age 1389)"...

  • Page 375

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 375 DL functions DL (additive tool offset) Address extension Value Range of values Meaning Range of values Type Meaning Number 8) - - - - - - 0 ... 6 INT Selection of th...

  • Page 376

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.1 Brief description Basic Functions 376 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 FA functions FA (axial feedrate) Address extension Value Range of values Meaning Range of values Type Meaning Number 8) 1 - 31 Axis number 0.001 ... 999 999.999 REAL...

  • Page 377

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 377 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Function Every pre-defined auxiliary function is assigned to a system function and cannot be changed. If a pre-defined a...

  • Page 378

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 378 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Predefined auxiliary functions General auxiliary functions, Part 1 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Stop 0 M 0 0 1 Condit...

  • Page 379

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 379 General auxiliary functions, Part 2 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Nibbling 28 M 0 25 6) (11) Nibbling 29 M 0 26 6) (12)...

  • Page 380

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 380 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 4 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 57 M 4 3 (78) Spindle left ...

  • Page 381

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 381 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 6 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Gear stage 2 88 M 6 42 (86) Gear stage 3 ...

  • Page 382

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 382 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 9 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 117 M 9 3 (93) Spindle left...

  • Page 383

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 383 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 11 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Gear stage 2 148 M 11 42 (101) Gear stag...

  • Page 384

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 384 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 14 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 177 M 14 3 (108) Spindle l...

  • Page 385

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 385 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 16 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Gear stage 2 208 M 16 42 (116) Gear stag...

  • Page 386

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 386 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Spindle-specific auxiliary functions, spindle 19 System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Spindle right 237 M 19 3 (123) Spindle l...

  • Page 387

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 387 Toolholder-specific auxiliary functions, T auxiliary functions System function Index <n> Type Address extension Value Group Tool selection 268 T 8 -1 ...

  • Page 388

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 388 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ( ) The value can be changed. 1) The value is depends on the machine data: MD22560 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_M_MODE (M function for tool change) 2) The value can b...

  • Page 389

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 389 7.2.2 Overview: Output behavior Significance of the parameters listed in the following table: Parameter Meaning Index <n> Machine data index of the p...

  • Page 390

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 390 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Index <n> Output behavior, bit System function 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Nibbling 27 0 0 0 (0) 0 0 0 (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (1) (0) ...

  • Page 391

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 391 Bit Meaning No predefined auxiliary function 2 A predefined auxiliary function is treated like a user-defined auxiliary function with this setting. The auxi...

  • Page 392

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 392 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Bit Meaning 17 Nibbling on 18 Nibbling Note In the case of auxiliary functions for which no output behavior has been defined, the following default outpu...

  • Page 393

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 393 7.2.3.2 Type, address extension and value An auxiliary function is programmed via the type, address extension and value parameters (see Section " 407,P...

  • Page 394

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 394 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Value The parameters "value" and "type" define the meaning of an auxiliary function, i.e. the system function that is activated on the...

  • Page 395

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 395 Output after motion ● The traversing motions (path and/or block-related positioning axis movements) of the current part program block end with an exact st...

  • Page 396

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 396 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 397

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.2 Predefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 397

  • Page 398

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.3 Userdefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 398 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.3 Userdefined auxiliary functions There are two uses for user-defined auxiliary functions: ● Extension of predefined auxiliary functions ● User-spec...

  • Page 399

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.3 Userdefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 399 The relevant predefined auxiliary functions can be extended for the following system functions: Type Address extension 1) System function Value Tool cha...

  • Page 400

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.3 Userdefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions 400 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 User-specific auxiliary functions User-specific auxiliary functions have the following characteristics: ● User-specific auxiliary functions only activat...

  • Page 401

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.3 Userdefined auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 401 7.3.1.3 Type, address extension and value An auxiliary function is programmed via the type, address extension and value parameters (see Section " 407,...

  • Page 402

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.4 Associated auxiliary functions Basic Functions 402 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Grouping together auxiliary functions If all the auxiliary functions of the same type and address extension are assigned to the same auxiliary function grou...

  • Page 403

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.4 Associated auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 403 Parameter assignment Association of a user-defined auxiliary function with one of the predefined auxiliary functions mentioned is set in the machine data: M...

  • Page 404

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.5 Type-specific output behavior Basic Functions 404 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Boundary conditions Please note the following boundary conditions: ● A user-defined auxiliary function may not be multiply associated. ● Predefined auxil...

  • Page 405

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.5 Type-specific output behavior Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 405 For a description of the various output behaviors, see the section titled 394,"Output behavior (Page 394,394)". Note For the output behavior th...

  • Page 406

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.6 Priorities of the output behavior for which parameters have been assigned Basic Functions 406 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.6 Priorities of the output behavior for which parameters have been assigned The following priorities must be ob...

  • Page 407

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.7 Programming an auxiliary function Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 407 7.7 Programming an auxiliary function Syntax An auxiliary function is programmed in a part program block with the following syntax: <Type>[<Addr...

  • Page 408

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.8 Programmable output duration Basic Functions 408 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example 2: Programming examples of auxiliary functions with the corresponding values for output to the PLC Program code Comment DEF Coolant=12 ; Output to P...

  • Page 409

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.8 Programmable output duration Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 409 Program code Comment N10 G94 G01 X50 M100 ;;Output of M100: during the motion Acknowledgment: slow N20 Y5 M100 M200 ;;;Output of M200: prior to the motion Ou...

  • Page 410

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.9 Auxiliary function output to the PLC Basic Functions 410 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.9 Auxiliary function output to the PLC Function On output of an auxiliary function to the PLC, the following signals and values are transferred to t...

  • Page 411

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.10 Auxiliary functions without block change delay Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 411 7.10 Auxiliary functions without block change delay Function For auxiliary functions with parameterized and/or programmed output behavior, ...

  • Page 412

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.12 Response to overstore Basic Functions 412 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example The user-defined M function M88 is intended to trigger a preprocessing stop. Parameter assignment: MD10713 $MN_M_NO_FCT_STOPRE [ 0 ] = 88 Application: Parts...

  • Page 413

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 413 Types of auxiliary functions that can be overstored The following types of auxiliary functions can be overstored: ● M (special function) ● S (spindle spe...

  • Page 414

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 414 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Output control Whether or not the auxiliary function is output to the PLC after a block search can be configured via bit 8 of the machine data: ● MD22080 $...

  • Page 415

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 415 M19 behavior (position spindle) After a block search, the last spindle positioning command programmed with M19 is always carried out, even if other spindle-...

  • Page 416

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 416 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization: MD11100 $MN_AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN = 4 MD22000 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP [0] = 5 MD22000 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP [1] = 5 MD22000 $MC_AUXFU_A...

  • Page 417

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 417 7.13.3 Time stamp of the active M auxiliary function When outputting collected auxiliary functions following a block search, attention must be paid to the se...

  • Page 418

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 418 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Group assignment: ● Group 5: M7, M9 ● Group 6: M8, M9 Part program (section): Program code ... N10 ... M8 N20 ... M9 N30 ... M7 ... During block search...

  • Page 419

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 419 Parameterization Suppression of the automatic output of the spindle-specific auxiliary functions after a block search is set via machine data: MD11450 $MN_SE...

  • Page 420

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 420 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Block search for contour with suppression of output of the spindle-specific auxiliary functions and start of an ASUB after output of action blocks. P...

  • Page 421

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 421 If a different response is required, the program sequence for block search (for example) "N05 M3 S..." and "N30 SPOS[2] = IC(...)" requir...

  • Page 422

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 422 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.13.6 Auxiliary function output with a type 5 block search (SERUPRO) Output behavior In the case of type 5 block searches (SERUPRO), an auxiliary function c...

  • Page 423

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 423 Output counter The user can output the collected auxiliary functions to the PLC on a channel-by-channel basis in the block search ASUB. For the purpose...

  • Page 424

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 424 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The global list is structured on the basis of the sequence in which the search target was found. It is intended to be used as a system proposal for auxiliar...

  • Page 425

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 425 This affects the groups of auxiliary functions for any spindle configured in the system, whereby the spindle number corresponds to an auxiliary function's ad...

  • Page 426

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 426 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Cross-channel auxiliary function An auxiliary function can also be collected on a cross-channel basis in the global auxiliary function list in the case of ty...

  • Page 427

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 427 Users/machinery construction OEMs can change the SERUPRO end ASUB. The subsequently described functions support processing the global list of auxiliary funct...

  • Page 428

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 428 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Function AUXFUDEL(...) Function: The function AUXFUDEL deletes the specified auxiliary function from the global list of auxiliary functions channel-specific ...

  • Page 429

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 429 Examples Two examples for configuring a user-specific SERUPRO end ASUB. Example 1: Deleting auxiliary functions and generating the auxiliary function output ...

  • Page 430

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 430 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N460 N480 CALL FILENAME ; Process a generated subroutine. N490 N510 DELETE(ERROR,FILENAME) ; Delete the file again after execution. ...

  • Page 431

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 431 Program code Comment ; Example: WAITM(99,1,2,3) N0890 LOOP N0920 AUXFUSYNC(NUM,GROUPINDEX,ASSEMBLED) ;;;Procedure to generate auxiliary function blocks fr...

  • Page 432

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.13 Behavior during block search Basic Functions 432 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N1340 N1350 IF ISQUICK N1360 ASSEMBLED= ASSEMBLED << ")" N1370 ENDIF N1380 ENDIF N1400 ENDIF N1420 ENDFOR N1...

  • Page 433

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.14 Implicitly output auxiliary functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 433 7.14 Implicitly output auxiliary functions Function Implicitly output auxiliary functions are auxiliary functions which have not been programmed exp...

  • Page 434

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.15 Information options Basic Functions 434 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Implicitly output auxiliary function M19 To achieve uniformity in terms of how M19 and SPOS or SPOSA behave at the NC/PLC interface, auxiliary function M19 can be out...

  • Page 435

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.15 Information options Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 435 Miscellaneous Only the group-specific M auxiliary functions are displayed. The block-by-block display is also retained. Up to 15 groups can be displayed, whereby only...

  • Page 436

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.15 Information options Basic Functions 436 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 system variables Meaning Note: A predefined auxiliary function can be uniquely identified via this variable. Type of the last auxiliary function collected for an auxi...

  • Page 437

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.16 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 437 Example All M-auxiliary functions of the 1st group will be stored in the order they are output id=1 every $AC_AUXFU_M_STATE[0]==2 do $AC_FIFO[0,0]=$AC_AUXFU_M_VA...

  • Page 438

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.16 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions 438 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Maximum number of auxiliary functions per part program block A maximum of 10 auxiliary functions may be programmed in one part program block. DL (additive tool ...

  • Page 439

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.16 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 439 Overriding the parameterized output behavior The parameterized output behavior of the auxiliary functions M17 or M2/M30 is overridden by the output behavior that...

  • Page 440

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.17 Examples Basic Functions 440 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.17 Examples 7.17.1 Extension of predefined auxiliary functions Task Parameter assignment of auxiliary functions M3, M4, and M5 for the second spindle of the channel Parameter ...

  • Page 441

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.17 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 441 Parameter assignment: MD22000 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP [ 1 ] = 5 MD22010 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [ 1 ] = "M" MD22020 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION [ 1 ] = 2 MD22030 $MC_AUXF...

  • Page 442

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.17 Examples Basic Functions 442 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Gear stages ● Spindle 1: 5 gear stages ● Spindle 2: No gear stages Switching functions for cooling water on/off ● Spindle 1 – "ON" = M50 – "OFF" = ...

  • Page 443

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.17 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 443 Spindle 2 ● Only one M function for directional reversal may be programmed in one block. The direction of rotation last programmed is to be output after block search. The foll...

  • Page 444

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.17 Examples Basic Functions 444 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP[5]=9 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE[6]="M" ; Description of auxiliary function 7: M1=40 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION[6]=1 $MC_AUXF...

  • Page 445

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.17 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 445 Program code Comment $MN_AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC[11]='H21' ; Specification of auxiliary function group 12 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE[17]="M" ; Description of auxiliary function ...

  • Page 446

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.18 Data lists Basic Functions 446 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 7.18 Data lists 7.18.1 Machine data 7.18.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10713 M_NO_FCT_STOPRE M function with preprocessing stop 10714 M_NO...

  • Page 447

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.18 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 447 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 22210 AUXFU_S_SYNC_TYPE S functions output time 22220 AUXFU_T_SYNC_TYPE T functions output time 22230 AUXFU_H_SYNC_TYPE H functions output ...

  • Page 448

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.18 Data lists Basic Functions 448 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D F function 1 - 6 quick DB21, ... .DBX67.0-5 - Extended address M function 1 (16 bit int) DB21, ... .DBB68-69 DB2500.DBB3004 M func...

  • Page 449

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.18 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 449 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D F function 2 (real) DB21, ... .DBB166-169 - Extended address F function 3 (16 bit int) DB21, ... .DBB170-171 - F function 3 (real)...

  • Page 450

    H2: Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 7.18 Data lists Basic Functions 450 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 451

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 451 K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 88.1 Product brief Channel An NC channel represents the smallest unit for manual traversing of axes and automatic processing of part programs. At any one time, a channel w...

  • Page 452

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.1 Product brief Basic Functions 452 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Block search The block search function enables the following program simulations for locating specific program points: ● Type 1 without calculation at...

  • Page 453

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.1 Product brief Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 453 Basic block display A second basic block display can be used with the existing block display to display all blocks that produce an action on the machine...

  • Page 454

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.2 Mode group Basic Functions 454 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.2 Mode group Mode group A mode group combines NC channels with axes and spindles to form a machining unit. A mode group contains the channels that are ...

  • Page 455

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.2 Mode group Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 455 ● Master spindle geometry axes can perform functions using the master spindle. ● Auxiliary spindles are all other spindles/axes in the channel apart fr...

  • Page 456

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.2 Mode group Basic Functions 456 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signals from NCK to PLC Digitizing Active machine function: REF, REPOS, TEACH IN var. INC, 10000 INC ......... 1 INC Change in mode group A configuration c...

  • Page 457

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.2 Mode group Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 457 8.2.1 Mode group stop Function The following NC/PLC interface signals are used to stop the traversing motions of the axes or of the axes and spindles in al...

  • Page 458

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions 458 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Unique mode All channels of a mode group are always in the same mode: ● AUTOMATIC ● JOG ● MD...

  • Page 459

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 459 Applies to all modes Cross-mode synchronized actions Modal synchronized actions can be executed by means of IDS in all modes for the f...

  • Page 460

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions 460 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machine functions Machine functions can be selected within a mode that also apply within the mode group: ● Machine functions within...

  • Page 461

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 461 JOG in Automatic JOG in AUTOMATIC mode is permitted if the mode group is in "RESET" state and the axis is jog-capable. "...

  • Page 462

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions 462 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● An ongoing JOG movement is not complete until the end position of the increment has been reached (if this has been set) or the mov...

  • Page 463

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 463 If the user attempts to jog the geometry or orientation axes, the NCK switches to “Internal JOG” and the movement executed. Severa...

  • Page 464

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.3 Mode types and mode type change Basic Functions 464 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 What mode transitions are possible and how these are executed can be configured in the PLC program on a machine-specific basis. Note...

  • Page 465

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.4 Channel Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 465 8.4 Channel Assignment part program - channel Part programs are assigned to channels. Part programs of different channels are largely independent of each othe...

  • Page 466

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.4 Channel Basic Functions 466 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Channel configuration Channels can be filled with their own channel name via the following machine data: MD20000 $MC_CHAN_NAME (channel name) The various ...

  • Page 467

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.4 Channel Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 467 Interface signals The signals of the 1st channel are located in the NC/PLC interface in DB21, the signals from channel 2 are located in DB22. The channel or c...

  • Page 468

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.4 Channel Basic Functions 468 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 For further information on the channel-specific signal exchange (PLC → NCK), see Section " 809,P3: Basic PLC 809, program for SINUMERIK 840D 809,sl (P...

  • Page 469

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.5 Program test Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 469 8.5 Program test Several control functions are available for testing a new part program. These functions are provided to reduce danger at the machine and...

  • Page 470

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.5 Program test Basic Functions 470 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program start and program run When the program test function is active, the part program can be started and executed (incl. auxiliary function outputs, w...

  • Page 471

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.5 Program test Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 471 8.5.2 Program execution in single-block mode Function In case of "Program execution in single-block mode" the part program execution stops afte...

  • Page 472

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.5 Program test Basic Functions 472 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Selection It is possible to select the single-block mode: ● Via the machine control panel (key "Single Block") ● Via the user interface For...

  • Page 473

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.5 Program test Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 473 8.5.3 Program execution with dry run feedrate Function During "Program execution with dry run feedrate" the traversing speeds which have been p...

  • Page 474

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.5 Program test Basic Functions 474 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Selection This function is selected via the user interface in the "Program control" menu. The selection sets the following interface signal: DB...

  • Page 475

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.6 Workpiece simulation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 475 Selection This function is selected via the operator interface in the "Program control" menu. The selection sets the following interfac...

  • Page 476

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 476 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Compile cycles in simulation (only 840D sl) Up to SW 4.4, no compile cycles are supported, from SW 4.4 and higher only selected compile cycles (CC) are s...

  • Page 477

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 477 Block search types ● Type 1: Block search without calculation Block search without calculation is used to find a part program block in the quickest pos...

  • Page 478

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 478 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.7.1 Sequence for block search of the type 1, 2 and 4 Time sequence The block search (Types 1, 2, and 4) proceeds as follows: 1. Activation via the us...

  • Page 479

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 479 Continuation mode after block search Following the block search, the program can be resumed via interface signal: DB21, ... DBX7.1 (NC Start). If an ...

  • Page 480

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 480 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.7.2 Block search in connection with other NCK functions 8.7.2.1 ASUB after and during block search Synchronization of the channel axes With the start o...

  • Page 481

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 481 For block search type 4, no approach movement is generated by the NC. Effect: ● After exiting the ASUB, the system variable $P_EP thus provides the act...

  • Page 482

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 482 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.7.2.3 Spindle functions after block search Control system response and output The behavior with regard to the spindle functions after completion of the...

  • Page 483

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 483 For later output of the spindle-specific auxiliary functions, the system variables can be read, for example, in an ASUB, and then output after output of ...

  • Page 484

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 484 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Behavior when the single-block processing is set Via the following channel-specific machine data it can be set, whether the activated ASUB is processed w...

  • Page 485

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 485 5. Automatic start of /_N_CMA_DIR/_N_PROG_EVENT_SPF (default) as an ASUB. 6. The NC will stop after changing the last ASUB block (REPOSA command) and the...

  • Page 486

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 486 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Execution behavior Search target found, restart search When the search target is reached, the program execution stops and the search target is displayed...

  • Page 487

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 487 8.7.5 Examples for block search with calculation Selection From the following examples, select the type of block search that corresponds to your task. Ty...

  • Page 488

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 488 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9. Manual operator actions (JOG, JOG-REPOS, overstoring) 10. Continue part program with NC Start. YX1002000300100200300400Approach point(170,30)Toolchang...

  • Page 489

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 489 YX1002000300100200300400Approach pointToolchange point (450,300)Approach movementN260 Figure 8-5 Approach motion for search to contour (target block N260...

  • Page 490

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.7 Block search Basic Functions 490 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N260 G2 J50 X100 Y200 N270 G1 X50 N280 Y50 N290 X150 N300 G0 G40 G60 X170 Y30 ; Deselect radius compensation N310 Z100 D0 ; ...

  • Page 491

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 491 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO 8.8.1 Description of the function Block search type 5, block search with calculation in the "Program ...

  • Page 492

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 492 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Chronological sequence of SERUPRO 1. Via HMI, softkey "Pog. test contour" and the search target are operated. 2. The NC now au...

  • Page 493

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 493 Controlling SERUPRO behavior For the functions listed below as an example, the SERUPRO behavior can be set specifically for the NC: ● Pr...

  • Page 494

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 494 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Acknowledgement of FC9 only after completion of REPOS block: The ASUB can only be signaled as complete from the FC9 block with "ASUB ...

  • Page 495

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 495 8.8.2 REPOS 8.8.2.1 Continue machining at the contour after SERUPRO search target found The "Reposition to the contour" (REPOS) ...

  • Page 496

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 496 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Repositioning with controlled REPOS The REPOS mode can be specified for the path axes via the NC/PLC interface: DB21, ... DBX31.0 - .2 (RE...

  • Page 497

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 497 The NC commences SERUPRO approach with a block that moves all positioning axes to the programmed end and the path axis to the target block...

  • Page 498

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 498 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Delayed approach of axis with REPOS offset With the axial level-triggered NC/PLC interface signal axis/spindle (PLC→NCK): DB31, ... DBX1...

  • Page 499

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 499 Note In the current ASUB, DB21, ... DBX31.4 (REPOSMODEEDGE) does not affect the final REPOS unless this signal applies to the REPOS bloc...

  • Page 500

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 500 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 REPOS acknowledgement signals The following NC/PLC interface signals can be used to acknowledge from the NCK, functions that control the R...

  • Page 501

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 501 in the following way: A part program is stopped at N20 (→ time (2) in figure). The NCK stops according to the braking ramp. After the PL...

  • Page 502

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 502 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Valid REPOS offset At the end of the SERUPRO operation, the user can read out the REPOS offset via the axis/spindle NC/PLC interface signa...

  • Page 503

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 503 REPOS offset after an axis interchange The group signal: DB21, ... DBX319.5 (Repos DEFERRAL Chan) can be used to determine whether a valid...

  • Page 504

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 504 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 REPOS mode RMNBL repositioning to the next point on the path in the RMNBL REPOS mode, positioning is made for the REPOS start position fro...

  • Page 505

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 505 8.8.3 Acceleration measures via MD Machine data settings The processing speed of the entire SERUPRO operation can be accelerated using the...

  • Page 506

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 506 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DryRun and SERUPRO affect the spindle/axis with the following G codes: ● G331/G332 causes the spindle to be interpolated as an axis in a...

  • Page 507

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 507 SERUPRO operation: Functionality: In sequence steps 2. to 6. SERUPRO ASUB: Functionality: The sequence of step 7. In addition, machine dat...

  • Page 508

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 508 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N1060 IF TNR_SPINDEL ==TNR_SUCHLAUF GOTOF ASUP_ENDE1 N1070 T = $TC_TP2[TNR_SUCHLAUF] ; T selection by tool name N108...

  • Page 509

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 509 8.8.5 Selfacting SERUPRO Selfacting SERUPRO The channel-specific function "Self-acting SERUPRO" allows a SERUPRO sequence withou...

  • Page 510

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 510 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation "Self-acting SERUPRO" is activated via the HMI as a block search start for the Type 5 block search for target channel...

  • Page 511

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 511 Example Program code Comment ... N010 IPTRLOCK() ; Locked area: Start N020 R1=R1+1 N030 G4 F1 ; Hold block ... ; Locked area N200 IPTRU...

  • Page 512

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 512 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment PROC PROG_2 ; Program 2 N210 IPTRLOCK() ; Ineffective due to program 1 ... N250 IPTRUNLOCK() ; Ineffective due to p...

  • Page 513

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 513 Automatic function-specific "Continue machining at the contour" lock For various couplings, the activation/deactivation of the ...

  • Page 514

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 514 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.8.7 Behavior during POWER ON, mode change and RESET SERUPRO is inactive during POWER ON. The mode change is permitted during SERUPRO. RE...

  • Page 515

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 515 Implicit preprocessing stop Situations in which Interpreter issues an implicit preprocessing stop: 1. In all blocks in which one of the ...

  • Page 516

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 516 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 References For detailed information on the SERUPRO block search, see Section " 281,Detailed description (Page 281,281)". 8.8.8....

  • Page 517

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 517 8.8.8.6 Couplings and master-slave Setpoint and actual value couplings The SERUPRO operation is a program simulation in Program Test mode ...

  • Page 518

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 518 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Reaching simulated target point for LEAD with JOG At the time of "Search target found", the coupling is already active, especial...

  • Page 519

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 519 To ensure that the ASUB can be automatically started, the following machine data must be set: ● NC-specifically: – MD11602 $MN_ASUP_ST...

  • Page 520

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 520 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.8.8.7 Axis functions SERUPRO conditions The special conditions for SERUPRO must be observed with axis enable, autonomous axis operations...

  • Page 521

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 521 Neutral axes that are however not allowed to be repositioned must receive the axial NC/PLC interface signal “REPOSDELAY”. This deletes...

  • Page 522

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions 522 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.8.8.9 Superimposed motion Only SERUPRO If "overlaid movements" are used, only the block search via program test (SERUPRO) can ...

  • Page 523

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.8 Block search Type 5 SERUPRO Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 523 8.8.8.11 Making the initial settings more flexible Initial setting/initial SERUPRO setting Machine data MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK define...

  • Page 524

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 524 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.9 Program operation PLC, MD, operation The execution of part programs can be controlled via the HMI in many ways using PLC inputs, machine data se...

  • Page 525

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 525 G groups An initial programming setting can be specified for each of the available G groups using MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES (reset state of G ...

  • Page 526

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 526 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4: Only those NC language commands are known which correspond to the current scope of active functions of the NCK software. All commands for non-act...

  • Page 527

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 527 $MN_NC_LANGUAGE_CONFIGURATION = (set value) results in the following interpretations of the option and function relative to their programmability 2x...

  • Page 528

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 528 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signals, Alarms Required signal states The part program can now be enabled for execution in the channel with the START command on the condition that...

  • Page 529

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 529 8.9.3 Part program interruption Channel status A part program interruption is only executed when the channel and program are active: ● DB21, ... D...

  • Page 530

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 530 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Possible actions in the interrupt state Various functions can be performed in the channel during a part program interruption, for example: ● Overs...

  • Page 531

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 531 8.9.4 RESET command Command priority Channel status The RESET command can be executed in every channel state. This command is aborted by another com...

  • Page 532

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 532 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.9.5 Program status The status of the selected program is displayed in the interface for each channel. The PLC can then trigger certain responses a...

  • Page 533

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 533 8.9.6 Channel status The current channel status is displayed in all operating modes at the NC/PLC interface (DB21, ... ) for each channel. Channel...

  • Page 534

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 534 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.9.7 Responses to operator or program actions Status transitions The following table shows the channel and program states that result after certain...

  • Page 535

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 535 8.9.8 Part-Program Start Start handling Table 8- 3 Typical program sequence Sequence Command Conditions (must be satisfied before the command) Com...

  • Page 536

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 536 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.9.9 Example of a timing diagram for a program run 21Program aborted with RESETProgram stopped with read-in disableAuxF M170 from PLC user program...

  • Page 537

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 537 ● The timer for the program runtime can be reset to "0" at the restart of the program. ● The timer for workpiece counting can be incre...

  • Page 538

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 538 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Workpiece count After the part program end (M02 / M30) has been attained, the activated workpiece counters ($AC_TOTAL_PARTS / $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS / $AC...

  • Page 539

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 539 8.9.11 Program section repetitions 8.9.11.1 Overview Function The program section repetition allows the repetition of any labeled section of a par...

  • Page 540

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 540 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Label search direction The part program block identified by the label can appear before or after the REPEATB statement. The search initially...

  • Page 541

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 541 Programming Syntax: REPEAT <Label> [P=n] Label Start label to which the instruction: REPEAT branches Type: String P Number of repetitions -...

  • Page 542

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 542 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming Syntax: REPEAT <Start_Label> <End_Label> [P=n] Start_Label Start label to which the instruction: REPEAT branches. Beginni...

  • Page 543

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 543 Programming Syntax: REPEAT <Label> [P=n] Label Start label to which the instruction: REPEAT branches. Beginning of the part program section...

  • Page 544

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 544 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Processing sequence Sequence during activation through part program start Initial state: Channel: In the Reset state Mode: AUTO AUTO + overstoring ...

  • Page 545

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 545 Sequence during activation through operator panel reset Initial state: Channel: Any Mode: Any 1. Control activates reset-sequence with evaluation o...

  • Page 546

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 546 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal chart The following diagrams show the signal chart of the NC/PLC interface signals DB21, ... DBB35 ("Program status" and "Chan...

  • Page 547

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 547 Note DB21, ... DBX35.4 ("Program status aborted") and DB21, ... DBX35.7 ("Channel status reset") are only received if event-dr...

  • Page 548

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 548 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Requirement for the activation: The application program (default setting: _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF) must be loaded and cleared. Note MD20108 $MC_PROG_EVE...

  • Page 549

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 549 Behavior when the single-block processing is set The behavior of the function "event-driven program call" in case of set single-block proc...

  • Page 550

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 550 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Behavior when the read-in disable is set The behavior of the function "event-driven program call" in case of set read-in disable (DB21, .....

  • Page 551

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 551 Suppress updating of the display of the program and channel states. In order to avoid a flickering of the display of the program and the channel sta...

  • Page 552

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 552 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Behavior for NC Stop The behavior of the function "event-driven program call" for NC Stop (i.e. NC/PLC interface signal DB21, ... DBX7.2, ...

  • Page 553

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 553 Processing status Via the user M function the PLC can be informed about the processing status of the event-driven user program. Scan for triggering ...

  • Page 554

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 554 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.9.12.5 Examples Example 1: Call of all events set with MD20108 Parameter assignment: MD20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK = 'H0F' Call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SP...

  • Page 555

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 555 Example 2: Call through Operator panel reset Parameter assignment: MD20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK = 'H04' Call of _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF for: • Operator ...

  • Page 556

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 556 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 A stop delay area is defined with the part program commands: DELAYFSTON Start of a stop delay area DELAYFSTOF End of a stop delay area References: ...

  • Page 557

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 557 NCK events Reaction Stop criteria STOPATEND_ALARM Immediate Alarm: Alarm configuration STOPATENDBYALARM STOP_ALARM Immediate Alarm: Alarm configurat...

  • Page 558

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.9 Program operation Basic Functions 558 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Stop criteria A stop event can be triggered by the following • NC/PLC interface signals from the PLC → "Hard" stop event • Alarms w...

  • Page 559

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 559 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines 8.10.1 Function 8.10.1.1 General functionality Note T...

  • Page 560

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions 560 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Interrupt signals ● A total of 8 interrupt signals (inputs) are available. ● All inputs can be controlled ...

  • Page 561

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 561 Activation The activation of an interrupt routine can be initiated: ● By a 0/1 transition of the interrupt s...

  • Page 562

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions 562 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 End of interrupt routine After the end identifier (M02, M30, M17) of the interrupt routine has been processed, ...

  • Page 563

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 563 8.10.1.4 NC response The different reactions of the control to an activated interrupt routine in the various ope...

  • Page 564

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions 564 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.10.2 Parameterization Effect of mode group-specific signals The effect of the mode group-specific signals (NC/...

  • Page 565

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 565 Channel-specific start enable for non-referenced axes in the channel ● MD20105 $MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_REFP_LOCK Th...

  • Page 566

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions 566 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Application example In case of a single-slide turning machine a stock removal cycle is started as ASUB in the JO...

  • Page 567

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 567 Boundary conditions ● MD20117 $MC_IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP only applies for IPO single block (SBL1). ● The se...

  • Page 568

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions 568 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.10.3 Programming Assignment interrupt signal ↔ part program The assignment interrupt signal ↔ part progra...

  • Page 569

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 569 REPOS-query With interrupt routines, sequences may be generated for which there is no unambiguous return to an i...

  • Page 570

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.10 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs), interrupt routines Basic Functions 570 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.10.4 Restrictions Cross-mode Start of interrupt routines Requirement MD11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK, at least bit...

  • Page 571

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.11 User-specific ASUB for RET and REPOS Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 571 8.11 User-specific ASUB for RET and REPOS 8.11.1 Function Function The NCK software supplied contains preprogrammed processes (i...

  • Page 572

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.11 User-specific ASUB for RET and REPOS Basic Functions 572 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Bit 2 defines in which directory the user-specific routine is to be searched first in case of activation. Bit Value Meaning 0 T...

  • Page 573

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 573 Continuation When using the system ASUB, the behavior for the continuation after execution of the actions is permanently specified within the ASUB: ● ...

  • Page 574

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions 574 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1. Stopping after every block is undesirable in many situations and/or with certain blocks. – 1. Example: Change after jog operation, if reorganizatio...

  • Page 575

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 575 Preprocessing stop for each block A preprocessing stop is executed for active SBL2 with each block with the channel-specific setting data SD42200 $SC_SI...

  • Page 576

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions 576 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example of an area in single block mode The area between N20 and N60 is executed as one step in single-block mode. N10 G1 X100 F1000 N20 SBLOF ; Deac...

  • Page 577

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 577 Program cycle:1 N100 PROC CYCLE1 DISPLOF SBLOF ; Suppress single block N110 R10=3*SIN(R20)+5 N120 IF (R11 <= 0) N130 SETAL(61000) N140 ENDIF ...

  • Page 578

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions 578 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4. Intermediate blocks 5. Block search group blocks 6. Init blocks 7. Blocks that cannot be reorganized 8. Blocks that cannot be repositioned 9. At a re...

  • Page 579

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.12 Single block Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 579 8.12.4 Single-block behavior in mode group with type A/B Classifying channels One mode group channel must be classified as a single-block control channe...

  • Page 580

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 580 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.13 Program control Options 1. Function selection (via operator interface or PLC) 2. Activation of skip levels 3. Adapting the size of the interpola...

  • Page 581

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 581 Function Selection signal Activation signal Feedback signal M01 (Programmed stop) DB21, ... DBX24.5 DB21, ... DBX0.5 DB21, ... DBX32.5 Associated M01...

  • Page 582

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 582 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation The 10 skip levels "/0" to "/9" are activated by the PLC setting the PLC → NCK interface signals. The function is...

  • Page 583

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 583 < < MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE The interpolation buffer is activated with no more than the maximum specified number of blocks. >= MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE...

  • Page 584

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 584 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.13.4 Program display modes via an additional basic block display Basic block display (only for ShopMill/ShopTurn) A second so-called basic block di...

  • Page 585

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 585 8.13.5 Basic block display for ShopMill/ShopTurn Configure basic block display The basic block display can be configured via the following machine da...

  • Page 586

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 586 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Additional boundary conditions for the basic block display: ● Modal synchronized action blocks with absolute values are not taken into account. ●...

  • Page 587

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 587 8.13.6 Structure for a DIN block Structure of display block for a DIN block Basic structure of display block for a DIN block ● Block number/label ...

  • Page 588

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 588 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Examples Comparisons between display block (original block) and basic block display: ● Programmed positions are displayed as absolute. The addresse...

  • Page 589

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 589 ● For the Spindle programming via S, M3, M4, M5, M19, M40 - M45 and M70 (or MD 20094 $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR (M function for switching over in...

  • Page 590

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 590 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● With the EXECSTRING command, the block generated via EXECSTRING is displayed in the display block. Original block: N910 DEF STRING[40] PROGSTRIN...

  • Page 591

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 591 Applications ● Direct execution from external programs In principle, any program that is accessible via the directory structure of the interface in...

  • Page 592

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 592 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.13.8 Execution from external subroutines Function Individual machining steps for producing complex workpieces may involve program sequences that re...

  • Page 593

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 593 Programming An external subprogram is called by means of parts program command EXTCALL. Syntax: EXTCALL("<path/><program name>"...

  • Page 594

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.13 Program control Basic Functions 594 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Execute from local drive Main program: Program code N010 PROC MAIN N020 ... N030 EXTCALL ("ROUGHING") N040 ... N050 M30 External...

  • Page 595

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 595 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Conc...

  • Page 596

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions 596 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System settings after run-up MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, bit 0 = 0 or 1 Figure 8-13 S...

  • Page 597

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 597 System settings after reset / part program end and part program start MD20110 $MC_RESET...

  • Page 598

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions 598 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 G code effective after run-up and reset / part program end The setting of the G code ef...

  • Page 599

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 599 Example Activate reset setting on reset: ● MD20110, bit 0 = 1 ● MD20112 = 0 Transfo...

  • Page 600

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions 600 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.14.1 Tool withdrawal after POWER ON with orientation transformation Function If a p...

  • Page 601

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.14 System settings for power-up, RESET / part program end and part program start Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 601 Example Orientation transformation and orientation axes with incremental encoders. Co...

  • Page 602

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 602 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Continuing machining AUTOMATIC mode For automatic execution of programs in the AUTOMATIC mode, all the machine axes, whose actual ...

  • Page 603

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 603 Functions that can be replaced The following functions can be replaced by subprograms: Auxiliary functions M Switching functions ...

  • Page 604

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 604 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization M function and subprogram M functions and the replacement subprograms are parameterized in the following machine ...

  • Page 605

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 605 Programming Rules for replacing M functions: ● The replacement subprogram is called at the block end ● Within the replacement ...

  • Page 606

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 606 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.15.2.2 Replacing T/TCA and D/DL functions Boundary conditions For replacing functions T, TCA, D and DL, the following supplem...

  • Page 607

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 607 Bit Value Meaning 0 The D or DL number is available in the subprogram in the form of a system variable (initial state). 0 1 The D...

  • Page 608

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 608 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example: Replacement of the T function Parameterization Meaning MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE = 0 Tool change with T function MD10...

  • Page 609

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 609 System variable System variable Meaning $C_M_PROG TRUE, if the M function has been programmed $C_M For $C_M_PROG == TRUE, contain...

  • Page 610

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 610 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.15.2.4 Example: Replacement of an M function Example 1 The function M6 is replaced by calling the subprogram "SUB_M6"....

  • Page 611

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 611 Example 2 The new tool is prepared for changing with the T function. The tool change is only realized with function M6. The T func...

  • Page 612

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 612 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example 4 The functions T and M6 are replaced by the subprogram "MY_T_CYCLE". The parameters are transferred to the subp...

  • Page 613

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 613 Parameterization Machine data Meaning MD11717 $MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME = "D_T_SUB_PROG" Replacement subprogram for D fun...

  • Page 614

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 614 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.15.2.6 Behavior in the event of a conflict Conflict case A conflict is present if several functions are programmed in one block ...

  • Page 615

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 615 8.15.3 Replacement of spindle functions 8.15.3.1 General Function When a coupling is active the following spindle functions can be...

  • Page 616

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 616 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Subprogram: Name The name of the replacement subprogram is entered in the machine data: MD15700 $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME = "<subp...

  • Page 617

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 617 Time that the subprogram is called ● M40 The time of the call cannot be set. The replacement subprogram is always called at the ...

  • Page 618

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 618 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Time that the replacement subprogram is called ● SPOS, SPOSA The time of the call cannot be set. The replacement subprogram is a...

  • Page 619

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 619 System variable Meaning $P_SUB_AXFCT Contains the active replacement types corresponding to MD30465 $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK $P_SU...

  • Page 620

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 620 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Main program Programming Comment PROC MAIN N110 COUPON(S2,S1) ;Close the synchronous spindle coupling N120 G01 F100 X100 S5000 ...

  • Page 621

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 621 Programming Comment N1130 _CA=$P_SUB_CA ; Axis name of the following spindle N1140 DELAYFSTON ; Start of stop delay area N1150 CO...

  • Page 622

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 622 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Replacement subprogram "LANG_SUB", version 1 Optimized for simplicity and velocity by directly addressing the spindles (...

  • Page 623

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 623 Replacement subprogram "LANG_SUB", version 2 Flexibility through indirect addressing using the system variable (leading ...

  • Page 624

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 624 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming Comment LABEL1_CONT: N2250 ELSE ; Position the spindle using M19 N2270 M[_LSPI]=19 M[_CSPI]=19 N2280 ENDIF N2285 DEL...

  • Page 625

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 625 Value Meaning 1 In the block, in which the replacement subprogram is called, only one stop is made. Regardless of whether: • The...

  • Page 626

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.15 Replacing functions by subprograms Basic Functions 626 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.15.5 Restrictions ● Function replacements are not permitted in: – Synchronized actions – Technology cycles ● There must ...

  • Page 627

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 627 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Information on the program runtime and workpiece counter are provided to support the machine tool ...

  • Page 628

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions 628 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following system variables are available for the timers that are always active: System variable Meaning $AC_ACT_PROG_NET_TIME A...

  • Page 629

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 629 System variable Meaning $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME_COUNT Changes to $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME After POWER ON, $AC_OLD_PROG_NET_TIME_COUNT is ...

  • Page 630

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions 630 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Residual time for a workpiece If the same workpieces are produced one after the other, then from the timer values: • Proces...

  • Page 631

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 631 System variable Meaning $AC_CUTTING_TIME Processing time in seconds The runtime of the path axes (at least one is active) is measu...

  • Page 632

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions 632 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Behavior of the timer that can be activated The behavior of the timer that can be activated for certain functions (e.g. test run feedr...

  • Page 633

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 633 ● Activating the measurement for the total runtime and the processing time with an active tool, including measurement with a program...

  • Page 634

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions 634 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.16.2 Workpiece counter Function Various counters with a range of values from 0 to 999,999,999 are available with the "Workpie...

  • Page 635

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 635 Activation The workpiece counter is activated with the machine data: MD27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER (activation of workpiece counters) Bi...

  • Page 636

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions 636 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Supplementary conditions ● Mode change / NC RESET The counters are not affected by a mode change or NC RESET. ● $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS...

  • Page 637

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.16 Program runtime / part counter Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 637 ● Activation of all counters: MD27880 $MC_PART_COUNTER = 'H3313' MD27882 $MC_PART_COUNTER_MCODE[0] = 80 MD27882 $MC_PART_COUNTER_MCO...

  • Page 638

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions 638 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.17 Data lists 8.17.1 Machine data 8.17.1.1 General machine data Displaying machine data Number SINUMERIK Operate Identifier: $MM_ Description 9421 MA_A...

  • Page 639

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 639 Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 11610 ASUP_EDITABLE Activating a user-specific ASUB program 11612 ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL Protection level of user-...

  • Page 640

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions 640 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20193 PROG_EVENT_IGN_STOP Prog events ignore the Stop key 20210 CUTCOM_CORNER_LIMIT Max. angle for intersection calcul...

  • Page 641

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 641 Reset response Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20110 RESET_MODE_MASK Initial setting after RESET / parts program end 20112 START_MODE_MASK Basic sett...

  • Page 642

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions 642 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Memory settings Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 27900 REORG_LOG_LIMIT Percentage of IPO buffer for log file enable 28000 MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM Memory...

  • Page 643

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 643 8.17.2 Setting data 8.17.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE Start angle for thread 42010 THREA...

  • Page 644

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions 644 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 8.17.3.3 Signals to NC Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Selected mode AUTOMATIC DB11.DBX4.0 - Selected mode MDI DB11.DBX4.1 - Selected JOG mo...

  • Page 645

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 645 8.17.3.5 Signals from channel Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D DRF selected DB21, ... .DBX24.3 DB1700.DBX0.3 Select NCK associated M01 DB21, ...

  • Page 646

    K1: Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response 8.17 Data lists Basic Functions 646 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D ASUB is stopped DB21, ... .DBX318.0 DB3300.DBX4002.0 Block search via program test is active DB21, ... .DBX...

  • Page 647

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 647 K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 99.1 Brief description 9.1.1 Axes Machine axes Machine axes are the axes that actually exist on a machine tool. Channel axes Every geometry axis and every special axis is assigned to a ch...

  • Page 648

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions 648 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Synchronized axes Synchronous axes are interpolated together with path axes (all path axes and synchronous axes of one channel have a common path interpolator). All...

  • Page 649

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 649 Axis container An axis container is a circular buffer data structure, in which local axes and/or link axes are assigned to channels. The entries in the circular buf...

  • Page 650

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions 650 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 SZS The settable zero system (SZS) is the workpiece coordinate system with a programmable frame from the viewpoint of the WCS. The workpiece zero is defined by the ...

  • Page 651

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 651 9.1.3 Frames Frame A frame is a closed calculation rule (algorithm) that translates one Cartesian coordinate system into another. Frame components Figure 9-1 Frame...

  • Page 652

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions 652 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Features in relation to axes The coarse and fine offsets, scaling and mirroring can be programmed for geometry and special axes. A rotation can also be programmed f...

  • Page 653

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 653 Mirroring The axis to be mirrored can be set via the following machine data: MD10610 MIRROR_REF_AX (reference axis for the mirroring) Value Meaning 0 Mirroring i...

  • Page 654

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.1 Brief description Basic Functions 654 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Suppression of frames The actual frames can be suppressed with the following operations: Command Meaning G53 Suppression of the actual zero offset (non-modal) G153...

  • Page 655

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 655 9.2 Axes 9.2.1 Overview Figure 9-2 Relationship between geometry axes, special axes and machine axes Figure 9-3 Local and external machine axes (link axes)

  • Page 656

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 656 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.2.2 Machine axes Meaning Machine axes are the axes that actually exist on a machine tool. Figure 9-4 Machine axes X, Y, Z, B, S on a Cartesian machine Application The followi...

  • Page 657

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 657 ● Axes for tool magazine ● Axes for automatic tool changer ● Spindle sleeves ● Axes for pallet changers ● Etc. 9.2.3 Channel axes Meaning Each geometry axis and each s...

  • Page 658

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 658 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example On a machine with two Z axes, Z1 and Z2, either of the Z axes can be programmed as the geometry axis in response to an instruction in the part program. Activation Axis r...

  • Page 659

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 659 Replacement of geometry axes All frames, protection zones and working area limitations are deleted. They may need to be reprogrammed after the replacement operation. The system ...

  • Page 660

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 660 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD20118 $MC_GEOAX_CHANGE_RESET Value Meaning 0 The current configuration of the geometry axes remains unchanged on reset and program start. With this setting, the response is...

  • Page 661

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 661 Transformation changeover The following interrelationships must be noted with respect to kinematic transformation and geometry axis replacement: ● Geometry axis assignments ca...

  • Page 662

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 662 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment GEOAX(2,W) ; Channel axis W becomes the second geometry axis. The first and third geometry axes remain unchanged. G17 G2 X20 I10 F1000 ; Full circle in the ...

  • Page 663

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 663 9.2.7 Path axes Meaning Path axes are interpolated together (all the path axes of a channel have a common path interpolator). All the path axes of one channel have the same acce...

  • Page 664

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 664 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Application Typical positioning axes are: ● Loaders for moving workpieces away from machine ● Tool magazine/turret Reference For further information, see Section " 809,...

  • Page 665

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 665 Channel control An axis interpolated by the main axis reacts in terms of: ● NC stop ● Alarm handling ● Program control ● End of program ● RESET Note The response at ...

  • Page 666

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 666 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 FGROUP command The command FGROUP specifies whether the axis is a feed-defining path axis (used to calculate the path velocity) or a synchronous axis (not used to calculate the ...

  • Page 667

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 667 9.2.11 Axis configuration Assigning geometry, special, channel and machine axes. Figure 9-5 Axis configuration

  • Page 668

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions 668 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Special features ● Leading zeros for user-defined axis names are ignored: MD10000 `$MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0] = X01 corresponds to X1 ● The geometry axes must be assigned...

  • Page 669

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.2 Axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 669 Example: Channel axis gap Channel axis B is not assigned a machine axis in the following example. Figure 9-6 Axis configuration with channel axis gap (excerpt) Special situatio...

  • Page 670

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.3 Zeros and reference points Basic Functions 670 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Requirement The NCUs involved must be connected using link communication as a requirement for using link axes. The link axes and link communication functio...

  • Page 671

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.3 Zeros and reference points Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 671 Reference point R The position of the reference point R is defined by cam switches. Reference point R calibrates the position measuring system. With increm...

  • Page 672

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.3 Zeros and reference points Basic Functions 672 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.3.2 Position of coordinate systems and reference points Control POWER ON For incremental measuring probes, the reference point must be approached each ti...

  • Page 673

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 673 9.4 Coordinate systems 9.4.1 Overview Cartesian coordinate systems DIN 66217 stipulates that machine tools must use right-angled, rectangular (Cartesian) coordinat...

  • Page 674

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions 674 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following coordinate systems are defined: MCS Machine Coordinat System BCS Basic Coordinate System BZS Basic Zero System SZS Settable Zero System WCS Workpiec...

  • Page 675

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 675 Figure 9-11 Interrelationships between coordinate systems

  • Page 676

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions 676 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.4.2 Machine coordinate system (MCS) Machine coordinate system (MCS) The machine coordinate system (MCS) is made up of all physically available machine axes. Fig...

  • Page 677

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 677 Axial preset offset The reference point of the control in the machine coordinate system (machine zero) can be reset via the "Preset offset (PRESETON)" fu...

  • Page 678

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions 678 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.4.3 Basic coordinate system (BCS) Basic coordinate system (BCS) The basic coordinate system (BCS) consists of three mutually perpendicular axes (geometry axes) a...

  • Page 679

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 679 Machine tools with kinematic transformation The BCS and MCS do not coincide when the BCS is mapped onto the MCS with kinematic transformation (e.g. TRANSMIT / face...

  • Page 680

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions 680 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.4.4 Additive offsets External zero offsets The "zero offset external" is an axial offset. Unlike with frames, no components for rotation, scaling and m...

  • Page 681

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 681 Effect of activation The offset for an axis becomes active when the first motion block for this axis is executed after the offset is activated. Example of possibl...

  • Page 682

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions 682 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Overlaid movements The "Superimposed motion" for the programmed axis can only be accessed from synchronized actions via the system variable $AA_OFF[axis]...

  • Page 683

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 683 9.4.5 Basic zero system (BZS) Basic zero system (BZS) The basic zero system (BZS) is the basic coordinate system with a basic offset. Figure 9-17 Basic offset bet...

  • Page 684

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions 684 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Chained system frames ● Chained basic frames Figure 9-18 Example of the use of the basic offset The following settings apply: ● The user can change the ba...

  • Page 685

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.4 Coordinate systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 685 9.4.6 Settable zero system (SZS) Settable zero system (SZS) The "settable zero system" (SZS) is the workpiece coordinate system WCS with a programmable f...

  • Page 686

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 686 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Actual-value display in relation to the WCS or SZS Code (excerpt) Actual value display: Axis X (WCS) Actual value display: Axis X (SZS) N10 X100 100 100 N20 X0 0 0 N3...

  • Page 687

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 687 Axial frame An axial frame contains the frame values of an axis. Example of the data structure of an axial frame for axis X: Axis TRANS FINE ROT MIRROR SCALE X 10.0 0.1 0.0 0...

  • Page 688

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 688 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.2 Frame components 9.5.2.1 Translation Programming The programming of the translation or coarse offset can be performed via the following commands: ● Example of data man...

  • Page 689

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 689 9.5.2.2 Fine offset Parameterization The fine offset is enabled via the machine data: MD18600 $MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS = <value> Value Meaning 0 The fine offset cannot...

  • Page 690

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 690 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.2.3 Rotation Overview (geometry axes only) Function The direction of rotation around the coordinate axes is determined by means of a right-hand, rectangular coordinate sys...

  • Page 691

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 691 Parameterization of the rotation sequence The following machine data is used to set around which coordinate axes and in which order the rotations are performed when more than ...

  • Page 692

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 692 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Assignment of rotary axis to geometry axis Rotary axis Geometry axis in channel x'' 1. Geometry axis y' 2. Geometry axis z 3. Geometry axis Range of values With RPY angles, p...

  • Page 693

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 693 Programming a frame component When programming a frame component, only the programmed component of the frame is written. The components that are not programmed remain unchange...

  • Page 694

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 694 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Gimbal lock Gimbal lock designates a geometric problem in which the rotation components can no longer be unambiguously calculated back from the position vector. Gimbal lock oc...

  • Page 695

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 695 Examples: Writing the complete frame The conversion is made in each block after the complete frame has been written. Saved rotation components Programmed x, RT y, RT z, RT N...

  • Page 696

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 696 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.2.5 Rotation with a Euler angles: ZX'Z" convention With Euler angles, the rotations are in the order z, x', z". Note Recommended use For historical reasons, Eu...

  • Page 697

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 697 9.5.2.6 Rotation in any plane CRPL - Constant Rotation Plane The predefined function "Constant Rotation Plane" enables a rotation to be programmed for a frame in an ...

  • Page 698

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 698 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.2.7 Scaling Programming The program commands below are used to program the scaling: $P_UIFR[1] = CSCALE(x,1,y,1) SCALE x = 1y = 1 $P_UIFR[1,x,sc] = 1 9.5.2.8 Mirroring P...

  • Page 699

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 699 9.5.2.9 Chain operator Frame components or complete frames can be combined into a complete frame using the chain operator ( : ). 9.5.2.10 Programmable axis name Geometry, chan...

  • Page 700

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 700 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming examples $P_PFRAME[SPI(1),TR]=22.22 $P_PFRAME=CTRANS(X, axis value,Y,axis value,SPI(1),axis value) $P_PFRAME=CSCALE(X,Scale,Y,scale,SPI(2),scale) $P_PFRAME=CMIRROR...

  • Page 701

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 701 9.5.3 Frames in data management and active frames 9.5.3.1 Overview The following frame types are available: ● System frames (see diagram) ● Basic frames ($P_NCBFR[n], $P_C...

  • Page 702

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 702 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Writing frames Data management frames and active frames can be written from the part program. Only data management frames can be written via the user interface. Archiving fram...

  • Page 703

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 703 Activating data management frames The behavior when activating data management frames can be set using the following machine data: MD24050 $MC_FRAME_SAA_MODE (save and activat...

  • Page 704

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 704 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.3.3 NCU global frames All settable frames G54 to G599 and all basic frames can be configured NCU globally or channel-specifically. A combination of these is also possible ...

  • Page 705

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 705 9.5.4 Frame chain and coordinate systems 9.5.4.1 Overview The figure below shows the frame chain for the current complete frame. The frame chain is located between the basic c...

  • Page 706

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 706 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.4.2 Relative coordinate systems Relative coordinate systems display the current setpoint positions of the axes which lie relative to a specified reference point in the act...

  • Page 707

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 707 The axis position in the relative coordinate system WCSRel can be read via the variable $AA_PCS_REL[ax]. The variable can be read in part program, BTSS and via synchronized ac...

  • Page 708

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 708 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following machine data can be used to set whether the ENS is with or without the programmable frame, the transformation frame and $P_ISO4FRAME: MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET ...

  • Page 709

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 709 9.5.4.4 Manual traverse in the SZS coordinate system Previously, geometry axes have been traversed manually in JOG mode in the WCS. In addition, there is also the option to ca...

  • Page 710

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 710 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.4.5 Suppression of frames Programming Command Meaning G53 Nonmodal suppression of the following frames: • System frame for cycles • Programmable frame • System fram...

  • Page 711

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 711 Parameterization Frame suppressions SUPA, G153 and G53 lead to the WCS, SZS and possibly the BZS jumping when frame suppression is active. This characteristic for position di...

  • Page 712

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 712 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.5 Frames of the frame chain 9.5.5.1 Overview There are up to four frame variants: ● Settable frames (G500,G54 to G599) ● Basic frames ● Programmable frame ● Syste...

  • Page 713

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 713 9.5.5.3 Channel basic frames $P_CHBFR[n] The number of basic frames in the channel can be configured via the machine data: MD28081 $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES (number of basic fram...

  • Page 714

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 714 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming basic frames Basic frames can be read and written via the part program and via the OPI by operator actions and by the PLC. However, only data management frames can...

  • Page 715

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 715 Example: $P_NCBFR[0] = CTRANS( ax1, 10 ) $P_NCBFR[0] = CTRANS(x, 10) $P_NCBFR[0, ax1, FI ] = 0.1 $P_NCBFR[0, x, FI] = 0.1 Rotations cannot be used on global frames. The progr...

  • Page 716

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 716 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.5.5 Complete basic frame $P_ACTBFRAME The chained complete basic frame is determined by the variable. The variable is read-only. $P_ACTBFRAME= $P_NCBFRAME[0] : ... : $P_N...

  • Page 717

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 717 MIRROR Mirrorings of a geometry axis were thus far (up to SW-P4) related to a defined reference axis only using the machine data: MD10610 $MN_MIRROR_REF_AX (reference axis fo...

  • Page 718

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 718 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example: TRANS X10 Y10 Z10 ATRANS X5 Y5 ; Total translations X15 Y15 Z10 G58 X20 ; Total translations X25 Y15 Z10 G59 X10 Y10 ; Total translations X30 Y20 Z10 G58 and G59 ...

  • Page 719

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 719 9.5.5.7 Channelspecific system frames Channelspecific system frames System frames are only described by system functions, such as PRESET, scratching, zero offset external and ...

  • Page 720

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 720 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 System frames in data management The system frames are stored in the static NC memory and can, therefore, be archived and reloaded. System frames in data management can be rea...

  • Page 721

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 721 ● $P_PARTFRAME In the part program, the variable $P_PARTFRAME can be used to read and write the current system frame for TCARR and PAROT for toolholders with orientation cap...

  • Page 722

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 722 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 For MD24030 $MC_FRAME_ACS_SET = 1, the frame is calculated as follows: $P_ACSFRAME = $P_PARTFRAME : $P_SETFRAME : $P_EXTFRAME : $P_ISO1FRAME : $P_ISO2FRAME : $P_ISO3FR...

  • Page 723

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 723 ● MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE = 2 The current complete frame is calculated again when the geometry axes are switched over, and the translations, scalings and mirrori...

  • Page 724

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 724 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Several channel axes can become geometry axes on a transformation change. Example: Channel axes 4, 5 and 6 become the geometry axes of a 5axis transformation. The geometry ax...

  • Page 725

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 725 Program: Program code $P_NCBFRAME[0] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,a,4,b,5,c,6) $P_CHBFRAME[0] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,a,4,b,5,c,6) $P_IFRAME = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,a,4,b,5,c,6):crot(z,45)...

  • Page 726

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 726 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 TRANSMIT Transmit expansions: The machine data below can be used to take the axial complete frame of the TRANSMIT rotary axis, i.e., the translation, fine offset, mirroring a...

  • Page 727

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 727 Translations: When selecting TRANSMIT, translations of the virtual axis are deleted. Translations of the rotary axis can be taken into account in the transformation. Rotations...

  • Page 728

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 728 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ; TRANSMIT is 1st transformer $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1=256 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0]=1 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1]=6 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2]=3 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[3]=0 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[4]...

  • Page 729

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 729 $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2=TRUE $MC_TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2=1 Part program: ; Frame settings N820 $P_UIFR[1] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,c,4) N830 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : c...

  • Page 730

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 730 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N1140 endif N1180 if $P_IFRAME <> CTRANS(X,1,Y,0,Z,2,CAZ,3,C,4):CROT(X,10,Y,20,Z,30):CMIRROR(X,C) N1190 setal(61000) N1200 endif N1240 if $P_ACTFRAME <> CTRANS(X...

  • Page 731

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 731 N1560 ; Deselect frame N2950 m30 N1580 Z20 G40 N1590 TRANS N1600 N1610 if $P_BFRAME <> CTRANS(X,10,Y,0,Z,20,CAZ,30,C,15) N1620 setal(61000) N1630 endif N1640 if $P_...

  • Page 732

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 732 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N2021 G54 N2021 G0 X20 Y0 Z10 C0 N2030 TRANSMIT(1) N2040 TRANS x10 y20 z30 N2041 ATRANS y200 N2050 G0 X20 Y0 Z10 N2051 if $P_IFRAME <> CTRANS(X,1,Y,0,Z,3,CAY,2) N2052 se...

  • Page 733

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 733 A rotary axis offset can, for example, be entered by compensating the oblique position of a workpiece in a frame within a frame chain. As a rule, this offset can also be inclu...

  • Page 734

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 734 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK = 'H4041' ; Basic frame is not deselected after Reset. ;$MC_RESET_MODE_MASK = 'H41' ; Basic frame is deselected after Reset. ;$MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[...

  • Page 735

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 735 Part program: ;Simple traversing test with groove side offset N450 G603 N460 ; Frame settings N500 $P_UIFR[1] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,b,4) N510 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : crot...

  • Page 736

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 736 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N820 endif N830 if $P_CHBFR[0] <> CTRANS(X,10,Y,0,Z,30,CAY,20,B,15) N840 setal(61000) N850 endif N860 if $P_IFRAME <> TRANS(X,1,Y,0,Z,3,CAY,2,B,4):CROT(X,10,Y,20,...

  • Page 737

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 737 N1200 if $P_BFRAME <> CTRANS(X,10,Y,20,Z,30,B,15) N1210 setal(61000) N1220 endif N1230 if $P_BFRAME <> $P_CHBFR[0] N1240 setal(61000) N1250 endif N1260 if $P_IFRAM...

  • Page 738

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 738 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD10602 $MN_FRAME_GEOAX_CHANGE_MODE = 2 Translations: When selecting TRAANG, translations of the virtual axis are deleted. Rotations: Rotation before the transformation is tak...

  • Page 739

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 739 ; TRAANG is 1st transformer $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1 = 1024 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[0] = 4 ; Inclined axis $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1] = 3 ; Axis is parallel to z $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[2] = ...

  • Page 740

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 740 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Part program: ; Frame settings N820 $P_UIFR[1] = ctrans(x,1,y,2,z,3,b,4,c,5) N830 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : crot(x,10,y,20,z,30) N840 $P_UIFR[1] = $P_UIFR[1] : cmirror(x,c) N...

  • Page 741

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 741 N1180 if $P_IFRAME <> CTRANS(X,1,Y,2,Z,3,CAX,1,B,4,C,5):CROT(X,10,Y,20,Z,30):CMIRROR(X,CAX,C) N1190 setal(61000) N1200 endif N1210 if $P_IFRAME <> $P_UIFR[1] N122...

  • Page 742

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 742 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N1540 X10 N1550 Y-10 N1560 ; Deselect frame N1580 Z20 G40 N1590 TRANS N1600 N1610 if $P_BFRAME <> CTRANS(X,10,Y,20,Z,30,CAX,10,B,40,C,15) N1620 setal(61000) N1630 en...

  • Page 743

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 743 N1930 endif N1940 N1950 m30 9.5.6.3 Adapting active frames The geometry axis configuration can change during program execution or on RESET. The number of available geometry a...

  • Page 744

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 744 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.6.4 Mapped Frames Overview The "mapped frames" function supports the cross-channel consistent change of axial frames inside channel-specific or global data manag...

  • Page 745

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 745 Mapping rules The following rules apply for frame mapping: ● The mapping is bidirectional. An axial frame can be written for AXn or AXm. The frame data is always accepted a...

  • Page 746

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 746 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description Parameterization: $MA_ ① Simple mapping relationship: AX1(K1) ↔ AX4(K2) MAPPED_FRAME[<AX1>] = "AX4" ② Chained mapping relationships: AX1(K...

  • Page 747

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 747 Activating the data management frame Data management frames can be written in the part program and via the user interface of SINUMERIK Operate. The following should be noted ...

  • Page 748

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 748 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description: N100 / N200 Channel synchronization for consistent writing and mapping of frame data N110 Writing of the settable data management frame $P_UIFR[1]: Moving the zer...

  • Page 749

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 749 Target frame is $P_IFRAME: TMP = $P_PARTFRAME : $P_SETFRAME : $P_EXTFRAME : $P_BFRAME $P_IFRAME = INVFRAME(TMP) : $P_ACTFRAME : $AC_MEAS_FRAME : INVFRAME($P_ACTFRAME) : TMP :...

  • Page 750

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 750 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ; Approach measuring point 2 g1 x5 y-3 ; Store measuring point 2 $AC_MEAS_LATCH[1] = 1 ; Approach measuring point 3 g1 x-4 y4 ; Store measuring point 3 $AC_MEAS_LATCH[2] =...

  • Page 751

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 751 if RETVAL <> 0 setal(61000 + RETVAL) endif if $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE <> 30 setal(61000 + $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE) endif if $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE <> 90 setal(61000 + $...

  • Page 752

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 752 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming Parameter 1: Type: FRAME Additively measured or calculated frame Strings for current frames: "$P_CYCFRAME", "$P_ISO4FRAME", "$P_PFRAME...

  • Page 753

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 753 9.5.8 Functions 9.5.8.1 Setting zeros, workpiece measuring and tool measuring PRESET is achieved using HMI operator actions or measuring cycles. The calculated frame can be wr...

  • Page 754

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 754 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation The activation of the external zero offset takes place through the interface signal: DB31, ... DBX3.0 (accept external zero offset) Behavior Upon activation of th...

  • Page 755

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 755 A frame rotation does not take place on activation, and a rotation which is already active is not changed. As in case T (only the tool can be rotated), the position of the rot...

  • Page 756

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 756 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 With PAROT, the translations, scalings and mirroring in the active frame are retained, but the rotation component is rotated by the rotation component of an orientational tool...

  • Page 757

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 757 Machining in direction of tool orientation Particularly on machines with tools that can be oriented, traversing should take place in the tool direction (typically, when drilli...

  • Page 758

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 758 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If in a block with MOVT the tool orientation is changed simultaneously (e.g. active 5-axis transformation by means of simultaneous interpolation of the rotary axes), the orien...

  • Page 759

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 759 For this reason, the language commands ROTS, AROTS and CROTS are used, with which the rotations can be immediately described as solid angles. The orientation of a plane in spa...

  • Page 760

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 760 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Frame rotation in tool direction With the language command TOFRAME, which also existed in older software versions, it is possible to define a frame whose Z axis points in th...

  • Page 761

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 761 If a rotating frame is already active before language command TOFRAME or TOROT is activated, a request is often made that the newly defined frame should deviate as little as p...

  • Page 762

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 762 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If one of the commands TOFRAMEX, TOFRAMEY, TOROTX, TOROTY is programmed in place of TOFRAME(Z) or TOROT(Z), the descriptions for adapting the axis directions perpendicular to ...

  • Page 763

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 763 SD42980 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE == 3: X and X' and well as Y and Y' each form an angle of 4.11 degrees. Note The named angles (8.13 and 4.11 degrees) are the angles, which the pr...

  • Page 764

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 764 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 TOROT (align Z axis of the WCS by rotating the frame parallel to the tool orientation) and TOFRAME (ditto.) The system frame for TOROT and TOFRAME is activated via the followi...

  • Page 765

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 765 N190 $TC_CARR17[1] = 0 ; Z component of the 3rd ; offset vector N200 $TC_CARR18[1] = 0 ; X component of the 4th ; offset vector N210 $TC_CARR19[1] = 0 ; Y component of th...

  • Page 766

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 766 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Basic frames $P_CHBFR[ ] and $P_NCBFR[ ] The behavior of the basic frame can be set using MD10617 $MN_FRAME_SAVE_MASK.BIT1: ● BIT1 = 0 If the active basic frame is changed b...

  • Page 767

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 767 In certain circumstances, alarms could be triggered when reintroducing saved data, if the frame affiliates, be they NCU global or channel-specific, have been changed using mac...

  • Page 768

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 768 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Frame Frame conditions after POWER ON Complete basic frame Retained, depending on MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK bit 0 and bit 14 Individual basic frames can be deleted with MD...

  • Page 769

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 769 RESET responses of system frames The system frames are retained in the data management after a Reset. The machine data below can be used to configure the activation of individ...

  • Page 770

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 770 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD20110 Significance MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] = 2 TOROT MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[52] = 3 TOFRAME MD20152 $MC_GCODE_RESET_MODE[52] = 1 TOROT and TOFRAME syst...

  • Page 771

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 771 Frame condition after RESET / part program end System frames Retained, depending on MD24006 $MC_CHSFRAME_RESET_MASK and MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[ ]. External zero offset...

  • Page 772

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.5 Frames Basic Functions 772 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 9.5.12.5 Block search Block search Data management frames are also modified when carrying out a block search with calculation. Cancellation of block search If the block search...

  • Page 773

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.6 Workpiece-related actual value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 773 9.6 Workpiece-related actual value system 9.6.1 Overview Definition The term "workpiece-related actual-value system" designates a seri...

  • Page 774

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.6 Workpiece-related actual value system Basic Functions 774 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Interrelationships between coordinate systems The figure below shows the interrelationships between the machine coordinate system (MCS) and the ...

  • Page 775

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.6 Workpiece-related actual value system Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 775 References: ● Programming Guide Fundamentals ● Function Manual, Extended Functions; Kinematic Transformation (M1) ● Function Manual, Speci...

  • Page 776

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.7 Restrictions Basic Functions 776 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Actual-value reading If the actual value of $AA_IW is read in the WCS after activation of a frame (zero offset) or a tool offset, the activated changes are already conta...

  • Page 777

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.8 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 777 9.8 Examples 9.8.1 Axes Axis configuration for a 3axis milling machine with rotary table 1. Machine axis: X1 Linear axis 2. Machine axis: Y1 Linear axis 3. Machine axis: Z1...

  • Page 778

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.8 Examples Basic Functions 778 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization of the machine data Machine data Value MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0] = X1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[1] = Y1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[2] =...

  • Page 779

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.8 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 779 Machine data Value MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX1] = 0 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX2] = 0 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[AX3] =...

  • Page 780

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.8 Examples Basic Functions 780 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machine data for channel 1 Value Machine data for channel 1 Value $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1] $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2] =X =Y =Z $M...

  • Page 781

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.8 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 781 9.8.3 Frames Example 1 The channel axis is to become a geometry axis through geometry axis substitution. The substitution is to give the programmable frame a translation c...

  • Page 782

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.8 Examples Basic Functions 782 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[0] = 1 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[1] = 2 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[2] = 3 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[0] = "X" $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_...

  • Page 783

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.9 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 783 9.9 Data lists 9.9.1 Machine data 9.9.1.1 Displaying machine data Number Identifier: $MM_ Description SINUMERIK Operate 9242 MA_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE Numerical basis for di...

  • Page 784

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.9 Data lists Basic Functions 784 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10617 FRAME_SAVE_MASK Behavior of frames for SAVE subprograms 10650 IPO_PARAM_NAME_TAB Name of interpolation parameters 10660 INTERMED...

  • Page 785

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.9 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 785 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 24050 FRAME_SAA_MODE Saving and activating data management frames 24805 TRACYL_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 Rotary axis offset TRACYL 1 24855 TRACYL_...

  • Page 786

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.9 Data lists Basic Functions 786 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Identifier Description $P_ACTBFRAME Active complete basic frame $P_ACTFRAME Active complete frame $P_BFRAME 1st active basic frame in the channel. Corresponds to $P_CHBFRA...

  • Page 787

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.9 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 787 Identifier Description $P_UIFRNUM Number of active settable frame $P_UIFR $P_WPFR Data management frame for the workpiece $P_WPFRAME Active system frame for the workpiece ...

  • Page 788

    K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames 9.9 Data lists Basic Functions 788 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 789

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 789 N2: Emergency stop 1010.1 Brief Description Function The control system supports the machine manufacturer in implementing an emergency stop function on the basis of the following functions: ● An emergency stop button is installe...

  • Page 790

    N2: Emergency stop 10.2 Relevant standards Basic Functions 790 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Emergency stop In accordance with EN 418, an emergency stop is a function that: ● Is intended to prevent or diminish developing or existing risks to operating personnel, and damage to ...

  • Page 791

    N2: Emergency stop 10.3 Emergency stop control elements Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 791 10.3 Emergency stop control elements Emergency stop control elements In accordance with EN 418, emergency stop control elements must be designed so that they latch mechanic...

  • Page 792

    N2: Emergency stop 10.4 Emergency stop sequence Basic Functions 792 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 10.4 Emergency stop sequence After actuation of the emergency stop control element, the emergency stop device must operate in the best possible way to prevent or minimize the danger...

  • Page 793

    N2: Emergency stop 10.4 Emergency stop sequence Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 793 Emergency stop sequence at the machine The emergency stop sequence on the machine is determined solely by the machine manufacturer. Attention should be paid to the following points ...

  • Page 794

    N2: Emergency stop 10.5 Emergency stop acknowledgement Basic Functions 794 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 10.5 Emergency stop acknowledgement The emergency stop control element may only be reset as a result of manual manipulation of the emergency stop control element according to...

  • Page 795

    N2: Emergency stop 10.5 Emergency stop acknowledgement Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 795 Effects Resetting the emergency stop state has the following effects: ● Within the controller for all machine axes: – The servo enables are set. – The follow-up mode is...

  • Page 796

    N2: Emergency stop 10.6 Data lists Basic Functions 796 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 10.6 Data lists 10.6.1 Machine data 10.6.1.1 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Length of the braking ramp for error states 36620...

  • Page 797

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 797 P1: Transverse axes 1111.1 Brief description Transverse axis Within the framework of "turning" technology, the transverse axis refers to the machine axis that travels perpendicular to the axis of symmetry of the spindl...

  • Page 798

    P1: Transverse axes 11.1 Brief description Basic Functions 798 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Several transverse axes in the channel The introduction several transverse axes in the channel involves a functional decoupling of diameter programming and reference axis for G96/G961/G9...

  • Page 799

    P1: Transverse axes 11.2 Defining a geometry axis as transverse axis Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 799 ● Offsets are entered, programmed and displayed in radius format. ● Programmed end positions are converted to radius values internally. ● The absolute int...

  • Page 800

    P1: Transverse axes 11.2 Defining a geometry axis as transverse axis Basic Functions 800 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 An axis can be simultaneously defined in MD20100 and in MD30460 (bit 2). For this, the channel-specific MD20100 has a higher priority than the axis-specific MD3...

  • Page 801

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 801 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Transverse axes can be programmed with respect to both diameter and radius. Generally, they are diameter-relate...

  • Page 802

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions 802 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Axis-specific diameter programming for several transverse axes in one channel Note The additionally specified axis must be activated via MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNC...

  • Page 803

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 803 Axis replacement via axis container rotation By rotating the axis container, the assignment of a channel axis can change to assignment of a machine axis. The cu...

  • Page 804

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions 804 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DIAM90/DIAM90A[AX] After activation of the reference-mode-dependent diameter programming, the following data are always displayed in relation to diameter regard...

  • Page 805

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 805 Extended functions for data that is always radius-related: The following applies for PLC axes, via FC18 or axes controlled exclusively from the PLC: ● The dim...

  • Page 806

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions 806 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Dimension on several transverse axes permanent diameter-related data Several transverse axes permitted by MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 2 = 1 do not behav...

  • Page 807

    P1: Transverse axes 11.3 Dimensional information for transverse axes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 807 Application Examples X is a transverse axis defined via MD20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF. Y is a geometry axis and U is an additional axis. These two axes are trans...

  • Page 808

    P1: Transverse axes 11.4 Data lists Basic Functions 808 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 11.4 Data lists 11.4.1 Machine data 11.4.1.1 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB[n] Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis 20060...

  • Page 809

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 809 P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 1212.1 Brief description General The PLC basic program organizes the exchange of signals and data between the PLC user program and the NCK (Numerical Control Kernel), HMI (Human Machine ...

  • Page 810

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.1 Brief description Basic Functions 810 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Event-driven signal exchange PLC → NCK An "event driven signal exchange PLC → NCK" takes place whenever the PLC transfers a request to the NCK (e.g....

  • Page 811

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.2 Key data of the PLC CPU Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 811 12.2 Key data of the PLC CPU Key data of the PLC CPU The overview of the key data of the PLC CPU integrated in the SINUMERIK NCU can be found in: Reference...

  • Page 812

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.3 PLC operating system version Basic Functions 812 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.3 PLC operating system version The PLC operating system version is displayed at: ● User interface of SINUMERIK Operate: "Operating area switc...

  • Page 813

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.5 Reserve resources (timers, counters, FC, FB, DB, I/O) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 813 12.5 Reserve resources (timers, counters, FC, FB, DB, I/O) Reserve resources (timers, counters, FC, FB, DB, I/O) The component...

  • Page 814

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions 814 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.7 Starting up the PLC program 12.7.1 Installation of the basic program The installation of the basic program is described in detail in: References CN...

  • Page 815

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 815 Compatibility with STEP 7 There are no dependencies between the basic program and current STEP 7 versions. 12.7.3 Version codes Basic program The versio...

  • Page 816

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions 816 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If blocks that are called by other blocks are subsequently modified in the interface (VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR) as the program is develope...

  • Page 817

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 817 Selection of the SINUMERIK archiving program The PLC series archive can be generated directly from the SIMATIC project as an alternative. ● Open the &...

  • Page 818

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions 818 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description Function Magic(bstrVal As String) As Long The call provides access to certain functions. The function must be called once after server insta...

  • Page 819

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 819 Program code Cont = Nothing Next Error = S7Ext.MakeSerienIB("f:\dh\arc.dir\PLC.arc", 0, Cont) ' Now error analysis The For Each ... Next b...

  • Page 820

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions 820 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 2. Copy the new basic program blocks into the SIMATIC S7 project (for a description, see Section 814,"Application of the basic 814, program (Page ...

  • Page 821

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.7 Starting up the PLC program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 821 12.7.9 Troubleshooting This section describes problems which may occur, their causes and remedies and should be read carefully before hardware is replac...

  • Page 822

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.8 Coupling of the PLC CPU Basic Functions 822 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.8 Coupling of the PLC CPU 12.8.1 General A CPU of the S7-300 automation system is used as PLC for the SINUMERIK 840D sl. The PLC-CPU is integrated into t...

  • Page 823

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.8 Coupling of the PLC CPU Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 823 Programming devices should preferably be connected via Ethernet or via MPI (Multi-Point Interface) directly to the PLC. Figure 12-1 NCK/PLC coupling on SIN...

  • Page 824

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.8 Coupling of the PLC CPU Basic Functions 824 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Workpiece-program-specific auxiliary functions transferred to the PLC are first evaluated by the basic program (interrupt-driven) and then transferred to th...

  • Page 825

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 825 12.8.4 Diagnostic buffer on PLC The diagnostic buffer of the PLC (readable using STEP 7) will enter diagnostic information on the PLC operating system. 12.9 Int...

  • Page 826

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions 826 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Function interface The function interface is formed by FBs and FCs. The figure below illustrates the general structure of the interface between the PLC and the...

  • Page 827

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 827 Compile-cycle signals In addition to the standard signals exchanged between the PLC and NCK, an interface data block for compile cycles is also generated if re...

  • Page 828

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions 828 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 NCK/PLC signals The group of signals from the NCK to PLC includes: ● Actual values of the digital and analog I/O signals of the NCK ● Ready and status sign...

  • Page 829

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 829 Signals PLC/Mode group The operating mode signals set by the machine control panel or the HMI are transferred to the operating mode group (BAG) of the NCK. The...

  • Page 830

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions 830 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The triggering and parameter assignment of NCK functions is performed by means of PLC function calls. The following function calls are available: ● Position ...

  • Page 831

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 831 The signals are transmitted cyclically at the start of OB 1 with the following exceptions: Exceptions include: ● Axial F value ● M value ● S value An axi...

  • Page 832

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions 832 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Control signals Some control signals are signal inputs, for example, via the machine control panel, which have to be taken into account by the HMI. This group o...

  • Page 833

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 833 ● Bit fields are evaluated at several levels by FC10. – Evaluation 1; Acquisition of group signals A group signal is generated for each group of signals if ...

  • Page 834

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions 834 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 User program The user PLC program merely needs to call the basic program block FC 10 with appropriate parameter settings in the cyclic program section and set o...

  • Page 835

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 835 ● The alarms / messages also get the 16-bit integer additional value (%Z parameter in the alarm text) in addition to the alarm number for the user area 0. The...

  • Page 836

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.9 Interface structure Basic Functions 836 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Topology SINUMERIK 840D sl On the 840 D, the machine control panel and the handheld unit are connected to the CP 840D sl Ethernet bus (see Figure below). Where ...

  • Page 837

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 837 MCP interface in the PLC The signals from the machine control panel are routed by default via the I/O interface to the PLC area. A dis...

  • Page 838

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 838 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The calls of the function blocks of the basic and user programs must be programmed by the user in the organization blocks (OB). Figur...

  • Page 839

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 839 Synchronization The PLC is synchronized with the HMI and NCK and CP during powerup. Sign-of-life After a correct initial start and the...

  • Page 840

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 840 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Auxiliary and G functions The auxiliary and G functions have the following characteristics: ● Transfer to the PLC is block-synchrono...

  • Page 841

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 841 G group decoders In the case of G functions sent by the NCK, the related groups are decoded and the current G number is entered in the...

  • Page 842

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 842 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.10.5 Diagnostic interrupt, module failure processing (OB 82, OB 86) General A module diagnosis or module failure on an I/O module t...

  • Page 843

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 843 Status signals: The status signals from the NCK, channels, axes, and spindles are reset. Auxiliary-function modification signals: Auxi...

  • Page 844

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 844 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Control of spindles (FC 18), ● Read/write variables (FB 2, FB 3) Note Checking and diagnostics of a function call of the basic...

  • Page 845

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 845 Asynchronous subprograms (ASUBs) An ASUB can be used to activate arbitrary functions in the NCK. Before an asynchronous subprogram can...

  • Page 846

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 846 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 AG_SEND/AG_RECV functions The AG_SEND/AG_RECV functions correspond to the functions of the library "SIMATIC_NET_CP" of the...

  • Page 847

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 847 UDT assignments UDT number Assignment to interface DB Significance UDT 77 DB 77 MCP and HHU signals with standard SDB 210 UDT 1002 DB ...

  • Page 848

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 848 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The assignment of the M function with extended address and the bit to be set in the signal list is defined in the decoding list. The s...

  • Page 849

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 849 Activation of the function The number of groups to be evaluated / decoded is indicated in the basic program parameter "ListMDecGr...

  • Page 850

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 850 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Three groups of M commands are to be decoded in the following example: ● M2 = 1 to M2 = 5 ● M3 = 12 to M3 = 23 ● M40 = 5...

  • Page 851

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 851 Structure of FB 1 in the OB 100 (enter the number of M groups to be decoded in order to activate the function): Call FB 1, DB 7( ......

  • Page 852

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 852 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The integer and real values are stored in DB 20 in S7 format. Hexadecimal data is stored in DB20 in the order in which they are input ...

  • Page 853

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 853 Example The project in the example requires 4 integer values, 2 hexadecimal fields with bit information and 1 real value. Machine data...

  • Page 854

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 854 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The structure of the machine data used is specified in a UDT: TYPE UDT 20 STRUCT UDInt : ARRAY [0 .. 3] OF INT; UDHex0 : ARRAY [0 ...

  • Page 855

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 855 12.10.11 Configuration machine control panel, handheld unit, direct keys General Up to two machine control panels and one handheld uni...

  • Page 856

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 856 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If an error is detected due to a timeout monitor, an entry is made in the alarm buffer of the PLC CPU (alarms 400260 to 400262). In th...

  • Page 857

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 857 Relevant parameters (FB 1) MCP HHU BHGRecObjNo (n.r.) MCPBusType = b#16#55 (via CP 840D sl) BHGSendGDNo (n.r.) BHGSendGBZNo (n.r.) M...

  • Page 858

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 858 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Address direct keys For the parameter Op1/2KeyBusAdr the TCU index is normally to be used. This affects the OPs, such as OP08T, OP12T...

  • Page 859

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 859 Here the DIP device address or the TCU index at the parameter "IdentMcpBusAdr" is activated by the user program together wit...

  • Page 860

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 860 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 PROFIBUS connection on the DP port (MCPBusType = 3) In case of PROFIBUS connection of the MCP, this component must be considered in t...

  • Page 861

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 861 Relevant parameters (FB 1) MCP HHU BHGSendObjNo (n.r.) BHGMPI = FALSE BHGStop MCP failure normally switches the PLC to the STOP ...

  • Page 862

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 862 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU MCP1Out MCP2Out BHGOut MCP1StatSend (n.r.) MCP2StatSend (n.r.) BHGStatSend MCP1StatRec MCP2StatRec ...

  • Page 863

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 863 Figure 12-17 PROFINET connection Relevant parameters (FB1) MCP HHU MCPNum = 1 or 2 (number of MCPs) HHU = 5 (via CP 840D sl) MCP1In ...

  • Page 864

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions 864 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Setting MCPxStop := True causes the basic program to deactivate the MCP as a slave via SFC 12. If the PLC does not switch to the stop ...

  • Page 865

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.10 Structure and functions of the basic program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 865 3. In this PLC cycle, communication with the new component can now be activated again by means of parameter MCP1Stop or MCP2Stop or BH...

  • Page 866

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.11 SPL for Safety Integrated Basic Functions 866 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.11 SPL for Safety Integrated Rather than being a function of the basic program, SPL is a user function. The basic program makes a data block (DB 18) a...

  • Page 867

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.12 Assignment overview Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 867 12.12.3 Assignment: DB Note Only as many data blocks as are required according to the NC machine data configuration are set up. Overview of data blocks DB ...

  • Page 868

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.13 PLC functions for HMI Basic Functions 868 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.12.4 Assignment: Timers Timer No. Significance T 0 ... T 512 1) User area 1) The actual upper limit of the timer number (DB) depends on the PLC CPU on wh...

  • Page 869

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.13 PLC functions for HMI Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 869 Interface signals Jobs from the PLC to HMI; perform a program selection in the NC: DB19.DBB13 (PLC → HMI) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ...

  • Page 870

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.13 PLC functions for HMI Basic Functions 870 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Error IDs at the PLC DB19.DBB27 (HMI → PLC) Value Meaning 0 No error 1 Invalid number for the control file (value in DB19.DBB16 < 127 or invalid). 3 Co...

  • Page 871

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.13 PLC functions for HMI Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 871 12.13.3 HMI monitor The HMI monitor is a data area in a freely-selectable user-specific PLC data block. Configuring HMI monitors The PLC address of the HMI m...

  • Page 872

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.14 Memory requirements of the basic PLC program Basic Functions 872 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.14 Memory requirements of the basic PLC program The basic program consists of basic and optional functions. The basic functions inc...

  • Page 873

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.14 Memory requirements of the basic PLC program Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 873 Basic program options FC 13 Display control HHU Can be loaded for handheld units 144 Error/operating messages FC 10 Acquisition FM/B...

  • Page 874

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.14 Memory requirements of the basic PLC program Basic Functions 874 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Basic program options DB 73 Revolver Generated by BP as a function of NC MD 40+44*R DB 74 Basic function Generated by BP as a functi...

  • Page 875

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 875 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector 12.15.1 Supplementary conditions 12.15.1.1 Programming and parameterizing tools Hardware For the P...

  • Page 876

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 876 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Testing and diagnostics (ONLINE) – Variable status/forcing (I/Os, flags, data block contents, etc.) – Status of individual blocks – ...

  • Page 877

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 877 12.15.1.2 SIMATIC documentation required ReferenceS: ● System description SIMATIC S7 ● S7-300 instruction list ● Programming with STEP 7...

  • Page 878

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 878 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 For storing the files created by NC-VAR-selector a catalog is to be implemented via the Windows Explorer with any catalog name. The selected d...

  • Page 879

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 879 The following ncv*.mdb variable list is available: Variables List NC variables including machine and setting data: ncv_NcData.mdb Parameters ...

  • Page 880

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 880 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.15.2.2 Description of functions Overview The figure below illustrates how the NC VAR selector is used within the STEP 7 environment. Figur...

  • Page 881

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 881 Basic display / basic menu After the NC VAR selector has been selected (started), the basic display with all input options (upper menu bar) ap...

  • Page 882

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 882 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 12-21 Window with selected variables for new project The selected variables are displayed in a window. Open an already existing projec...

  • Page 883

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 883 Storing a project The variable list is stored using the "Project" > "Save" or "Save As...." menu items. "...

  • Page 884

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 884 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Selecting an NC variable list A list of all the NC variables for an NC version can now be selected and displayed via the "NC Variable Lis...

  • Page 885

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 885 There are three options: ● Display all data ● Input area, block and name (incl. combinations) ● Display MD/SE data number The following ...

  • Page 886

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 886 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 12-25 Screen with complete list and selected variables Scrolling A scroll bar is displayed if it is not possible to display all variab...

  • Page 887

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 887 Delete variables Variables are deleted in the window of selected variables by selecting the appropriate variables (single mouse click) and pre...

  • Page 888

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.15 Basic conditions and NC VAR selector Basic Functions 888 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Settings Under this menu item, the DB number and the symbol for this DB number for which the code is created is entered. Under the "Mass ...

  • Page 889

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 889 12.16 Block descriptions 12.16.1 FB 1: RUN_UP Basic program, startup section Function The synchronization of NCK and PLC is performed during startup. The data ...

  • Page 890

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 890 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Declaration SINUMERIK 840D sl FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 1 VAR_INPUT MCPNum: INT:=1; //0: No MCP //1: 1 MCP (default) //2: 2 MCPs MCP1In: POINTER; //Start addr. in...

  • Page 891

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 891 NCCyclTimeout: S5TIME:= S5T#200MS; NCRunupTimeout: S5TIME:= S5T#50S; ListMDecGrp: INT:=0; NCKomm: BOOL:= FALSE; MMCToIF: BOOL:=TRUE; HWheelMMC: BOOL:...

  • Page 892

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 892 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description of formal parameters of SINUMERIK 840D sl The table below lists all formal parameters of the RUN_UP function for the 840D sl: Signal Type Type Rang...

  • Page 893

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 893 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark MCPBusType I BYTE Right-hand half byte (bits 0...3) for MCP1Left-hand half byte (bits 4...7) for MCP2 b#16#33: PROFIBUS...

  • Page 894

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 894 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark 0: Start transmission of handheld unit signals BHGStop I BOOL 1: Stop transmission of handheld unit signals 0: Send a...

  • Page 895

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 895 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark Op1KeyOut Op2KeyOut I POINTER P#Ax.0 or P#Mx.0 or P#DBn.DBXx.0. Start address for the output signals of the affected dir...

  • Page 896

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 896 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MCP/HHU monitoring (840D sl) The following alarms are displayed at HMI in cases of errors for the communication with the machine control panel (MCP): ● 400260...

  • Page 897

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 897 12.16.2 FB 2: Read GET NC variable Function The FB 2 "GET" function block can be used to read variables from the area of the NC from the PLC user pr...

  • Page 898

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 898 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note FB 2 can read NC variables only if basic program parameter NCKomm "1" has been set to "1" (in OB 100: FB 1, DB 7). The call is permitt...

  • Page 899

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 899 Column2 : WORD ; Line2 : WORD ; Addr3 : ANY ; Unit3 : BYTE ; Column3 : WORD ; Line3 : WORD ; Addr4 : ANY ; Unit4 : BYTE ; Column4 : WORD ; Line4 : WORD ; Addr5 ...

  • Page 900

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 900 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description of formal parameters The following table shows all formal parameters of FB 2. Parameter Type Type Range of values Remark Req I BOOL - Job start wit...

  • Page 901

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 901 State Meaning Note WORD H WORD L 0 7 Option not set BP parameter "NCKomm" is not set 1 - 8 8 Incorrect target area (RD) RD1 to RD8 may not be local ...

  • Page 902

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 902 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Call example Reading of three channel-specific machine data from channel 1, whose address specifications are stored in DB120. Select data with NC VAR selector a...

  • Page 903

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 903 NDR := M100.1, State := MW104, RD1 := P#DB99.DBX0.0 BYTE 1, RD2 := P#DB99.DBX1.0 BYTE 1, RD3 := P#M110.0 INT 1); Example: Variable addressing Reading of two R p...

  • Page 904

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 904 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Data types The data types of the NCK are listed in the NC VAR selector with the variables. The tables below give the assignments to the S7 data types. Classifi...

  • Page 905

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 905 Variable addressing For some NC variables, it is necessary to select "Area no." and/or "Line" or "Column" from the NC VAR selector...

  • Page 906

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 906 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 NCK variables within one group can be combined in a job: Area Group 1 C[1] N B A T Group 2 C[2] N B A T Group 3 V[.] H[.] The same rules apply for channels...

  • Page 907

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 907 Line6 : WORD ; Addr7 : ANY ; Unit7 : BYTE ; Column7 : WORD ; Line7 : WORD ; Addr8 : ANY ; Unit8 : BYTE ; Column8 : WORD ; Line8 : WORD ; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Erro...

  • Page 908

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 908 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark State O WORD - See error identifiers SD1 - SD8 I/O ANY P#Mm.n BYTE x... P#DBnr.dbxm.n BYTE x Data to be written Error id...

  • Page 909

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 909 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function (2) Positive acknowledgement: variables have been written (3) Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgeme...

  • Page 910

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 910 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 R M 100.0; //Terminate job CALL FB 3, DB 111 ( Req := M 100.0, NumVar := 3, //Write three variables Addr1 := NCVAR.rpa_5C1RP, Addr2 := NCVAR.rpa_11C1RP, Addr...

  • Page 911

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 911 State := MW 12, SD1 := P#M 4.0 REAL 1, SD2 := P#M 24.0 REAL 1); 12.16.4 PI services 12.16.4.1 FB 4: PI_SERV PI service request Function The function block FB ...

  • Page 912

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 912 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Addr1 : ANY ; Addr2 : ANY ; Addr3 : ANY ; Addr4 : ANY ; WVar1 : WORD ; WVar2 : WORD ; WVar3 : WORD ; WVar4 : WORD ; WVar5 : WORD ; WVar6 : WORD ; WVar7 : WORD ;...

  • Page 913

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 913 Error identifiers If it was not possible to execute a job, the failure is indicated by "logic 1" at "Error" output. The cause of the error i...

  • Page 914

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 914 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 PI service Function 916,DIGIOF (Page 916,916) Digitizing off 917,FINDBL (Page 917,917) Activate block search 917,LOGIN (Page 917) Activate password 91...

  • Page 915

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 915 References Programming Manual, Job Planning; Section: "File and Program Management" > "Program Memory". Parameterization Signal Type Ran...

  • Page 916

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 916 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.4.5 PI service: CONFIG Function: Reconfiguration The reconfiguration command activates machine data which has been entered sequentially by the operator or...

  • Page 917

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 917 12.16.4.8 PI service: FINDBL Function: Activate search A channel is switched to search mode and the appropriate acknowledgement then transmitted. The search is ...

  • Page 918

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 918 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.4.11 PI service: NCRES Function: Trigger NC-RESET Triggers an NC-RESET. Parameters "Unit" and "WVar1" must always be set to 0. Paramet...

  • Page 919

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 919 12.16.4.13 PI service: SETUDT Function: Set function current user data active The current user data, such as tool offsets, basic frames and settable frames are ...

  • Page 920

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 920 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization Signal Type Range of values Meaning PIService ANY PI.RETRAC Select JOG retract mode Unit INT 1 to 10 Channel Retraction axis: Determination of...

  • Page 921

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 921 Signal Type Range of values Meaning WVar1 INT T number of tool for which cutting edge must be created. A setting of 00000 states that the cutting edge should n...

  • Page 922

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 922 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.4.19 PI service: DELECE Function: Delete a tool cutting edge If the T number of an existing tool is specified in parameter "T number" in the PI ...

  • Page 923

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 923 12.16.4.21 PI service: MMCSEM Semaphores for various PI services, for use by HMI and PLC Ten semaphores are available for each channel. These protect critical f...

  • Page 924

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 924 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.4.22 PI service: TMCRTO Function: Create tool Create a tool with specification a name, a duplo number, e.g. with: ● $TC_TP1[y] = duplo number; ● $TC_T...

  • Page 925

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 925 12.16.4.23 PI service: TMFDPL Function: Search for empty location for loading, depending on the parameter assignment ● Location_number_to = -1, Magazine_numbe...

  • Page 926

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 926 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Range of values Meaning WVar4 INT Location_number _ID WVar5 INT Magazine_number_ID 12.16.4.24 PI service: TMFPBP Function: Empty location search ...

  • Page 927

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 927 Signal Type Range of values Meaning WVar11 INT Number of required location type Specifies the required search direction 0 Search strategy as set in $TC_MAMP2 1...

  • Page 928

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 928 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization Signal Type Range of values Meaning PIService ANY PI.TMGETT Determining the T number Unit INT 1 ... 10 TOA Addr1 STRING Max. 32 characters Nam...

  • Page 929

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 929 With location_number_to = -2 and a valid magazine number, loading takes place into the currently queued magazine position of the specified magazine. After execu...

  • Page 930

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 930 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Tool name and duplo number The location where the tool is positioned traverses; the "T number", "location number_from" and "magazi...

  • Page 931

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 931 12.16.4.29 PI service: TMRASS Function: Reset active status Resetting the active status on worn tools This PI service is used to search for all tools with the ...

  • Page 932

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 932 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Range of values Meaning 8: Sum-offset monitoring is reset. Combinations of monitoring types can be reset by adding the values above. 0: All active ...

  • Page 933

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 933 MagNr From PlaceNr From MagNr To PlaceNr To Search area WVar1 WVar2 WVar3 WVar4 #M1 #P1 #M2 #P2 Locations starting at magazine #M1, location #P1 up to ma...

  • Page 934

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 934 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterization Signal Type Range of values Meaning PIService ANY PI.TSEARC Complex search using search screen forms Unit INT 1 ... 10 TOA WVar1 INT MagNrFro...

  • Page 935

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 935 12.16.4.32 PI service: TMCRMT Function: Create multitool Creating a new multitool with specification of an identifier, optionally a multitool number, number o...

  • Page 936

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 936 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Range of values Meaning Addr1 STRING Max. 32 characters Multitool identifier WVar1 INT 0 Reserved Multitool number 1 to 32000: Delete the specified ...

  • Page 937

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 937 Signal Type Range of values Meaning Duplo number of the tool to be positioned in the multitool WVar3 INT -1 ... 32000 -1: Duplo number is irrelevant (then WVar2...

  • Page 938

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 938 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Range of values Meaning Number of the multitool in which the empty location search/testing should take place WVar3 INT -1 ... 32000 -1: Search acros...

  • Page 939

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 939 U M 1.0; //Error pending R M 0.0; //Terminate job CALL FB 4, DB 126 ( Req := M0.0, PIService := PI.SELECT, Unit := 1, // CHAN 1 Addr1 := STR.Path, Ad...

  • Page 940

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 940 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Any errors are displayed via the output parameters "Error" and "State". Note In order to read a double variable from the NCK without adapt...

  • Page 941

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 941 Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal parameters of the GETGUD function. Signal Type Type Value range Comment Req I BOOL Job start...

  • Page 942

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 942 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 State Meaning Note WORD H WORD L 0 6 FIFO full Job must be repeated, since queue is full 0 7 Option not set BP parameter "NCKomm" is not set 0 8 In...

  • Page 943

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 943 Call example 1 Read a GUD variable from channel 1 with the name "GUDVAR1" (type definition of the variables: INTEGER). The user-defined variable shoul...

  • Page 944

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 944 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Function FC "VariablenCall" : VOID U I 7.7; //Unassigned machine control panel key S M 100.0; //Activate req. U M 100.1; //Done completed message R M...

  • Page 945

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 945 Call example 2 Read a GUD variable from channel 1 with the name "GUD_STRING" (type definition of the variables: STRING with length 30 bytes). The user...

  • Page 946

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 946 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 //A user-defined channel variable from channel 1 must be read //with conversion into a variable pointer to allow subsequent //writing of this variable. Functi...

  • Page 947

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 947 12.16.6 FB 7: PI_SERV2 (PI service request) Function Apart from a larger number of WVar parameters, the FB 7 function block has the same functionality as the ...

  • Page 948

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 948 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description of formal parameters Signal Type Type Range of values Remark Req I BOOL Job request PIService I ANY [DBName].[VarName] Standard is: "PI"...

  • Page 949

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 949 Brief description of a few important functions Active/passive operating mode: An online HMI can operate in two different modes: Active mode: Operator can contr...

  • Page 950

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 950 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Declaration of the function FUNCTION_BLOCK FB 9 VAR_INPUT Ack : BOOL ; //Acknowledge interrupts OPMixedMode: BOOL:= FALSE; //Mixed operation with non-M-to-N-...

  • Page 951

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 951 Formal parameters of M:N function Signal Type Type Remark Alarm6 Q BOOL Interrupt: Queuing HMI is not going online! Report Q BOOL Message: Sign-of-life monitor...

  • Page 952

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 952 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Call example for FB 1 (Call in OB 100) CALL "RUN_UP", "gp_par" ( MCPNum := 1, MCP1In := P#I 0.0, MCP1Out := P#Q 0.0, MCP1StatSend := P...

  • Page 953

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 953 R M 100.2; //Reset auxiliary flag 1 JC smth2; U M 100.3; //Comparison has taken place SPB MCP; //Call MCP program // Route the stored override to the interface ...

  • Page 954

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 954 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Simplified block diagram in CSF The figure below shows only one acknowledgment input Ack1 and one delayed deactivation output Out1. The circuit for Ack2 and the...

  • Page 955

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 955 Out2 : BOOL; //Delayed output to false by timer 2 Out3 : BOOL; //Delayed output to false by timer 3 END_VAR VAR_INOUT FirstRun : BOOL; //TRUE by user after 1...

  • Page 956

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 956 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.9 FB 11: Brake test Function The braking operation check should be used for all axes, which must be prevented from moving in an uncontrolled manner by a h...

  • Page 957

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 957 The brake test is divided into the following steps: Brake test sequence Step Expected feedback Monitoring time value Start brake test DBX 71.0 = 1 TV_BTactiv C...

  • Page 958

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 958 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description of formal parameters The following table lists all of the formal parameters of the brake test function Formal parameters of brake test function Sig...

  • Page 959

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 959 Note The block must be called by the user program. The user must provide an instance DB with any number for this purpose. The call is multi-instance-capable. ...

  • Page 960

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 960 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 TimerNo := T 110, //Timer number TV_BTactiv := S5T#200MS, //Monitoring time value: //Brake test active DBX71.0 TV_Bclose := S5T#1S, //Monitoring time valu...

  • Page 961

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 961 Stop := FALSE, Funct := B#16#5, //Mode: Axis mode Mode := B#16#1, //Procedure: Incremental AxisNo := 3, //Axis number of axis to be traversed //axis Z...

  • Page 962

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 962 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Data trigger The data trigger function is intended to allow triggering on specific values (or bits) at any permissible memory cell. The cell to be triggered is ...

  • Page 963

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 963 Structure for ring buffer TITLE = //Ring buffer DB for FB 29 VERSION : 1.0 STRUCT Field: ARRAY [0 .. 249 ] OF STRUCT //can be any size of this struct Cy...

  • Page 964

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 964 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Formal parameters of diagnostics function Signal Type Type Value range Remark ClearBuf I BOOL Delete ring buffer DB and reset pointer BufAddr BufAddr I/O INT ...

  • Page 965

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 965 NewCycle := TRUE, Var1 := MB 100, BufDB := 81, ClearBuf :=M 50.0); END_FUNCTION 12.16.11 FC 2: GP_HP Basic program, cyclic section Function The complete ...

  • Page 966

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 966 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 OB1_PREV_CYCLE : INT; OB1_MIN_CYCLE : INT; OB1_MAX_CYCLE : INT; OB1_DATE_TIME : DATE_AND_TIME; END_VAR BEGIN CALL FC 2; //Call basic program as first FC //...

  • Page 967

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 967 NC process interrupts If the interrupt is triggered by the NC (possible in each IPO cycle), a bit in the local data of OB 40 ("GP_IRFromNCK") is set b...

  • Page 968

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 968 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Position reached In the bit structure, "GP_InPosition" of the local data of OB 40 is specific to the machine axis (each bit corresponds to an axis/spi...

  • Page 969

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 969 12.16.13 FC 5: GP_DIAG Basic program, diagnostic alarm, and module failure Function Module defects and module failures are detected in this section of the basic...

  • Page 970

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 970 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 OB82_PRIM_BATT_FLT : BOOL ; OB82_BCKUP_BATT_FLT : BOOL ; OB82_RESERVED_2 : BOOL ; OB82_RACK_FLT : BOOL ; OB82_PROC_FLT : BOOL ; OB82_EPROM_FLT :...

  • Page 971

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 971 Declaration of the function STL Representation FUNCTION FC 6 : VOID VAR_INPUT Start: BOOL; TaskIdent: BYTE ; TaskIdentNo: BYTE ; NewToolMag: INT; NewT...

  • Page 972

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 972 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.15 FC 7: TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with revolver Function After a revolver has been changed, the user will call the block FC TM_REV. The revo...

  • Page 973

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 973 OldToolMag = Magazine no. of the buffer storage (spindle) = 9998 OldToolLoc = Buffer storage no. of the spindle Status = 1 If the revolver is now turned to a...

  • Page 974

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 974 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function by means of a positive edge (2) Positive acknowledgement: Tool management has been transferred (3) Reset function a...

  • Page 975

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 975 12.16.16 FC 8: TM_TRANS transfer block for tool management Function The user calls this block FC TM-TRANS when the position of the tool or the status of the tr...

  • Page 976

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 976 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Asynchronous transfer To ensure that changes in the position of a tool are automatically signaled from PLC to tool management (e.g. power failure during an acti...

  • Page 977

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 977 Status: INT; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Ready BOOL; Error : INT; END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Description of formal parameters The table below lists all formal paramet...

  • Page 978

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 978 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark 3: Illegal task ("signal "Interface (SS) active" of selected revolver = "FALSE") Other values:...

  • Page 979

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 979 3. In the case of "Change" (spindle or revolver), the tools addressed in the interface have now reached the required target addresses. The tool-chang...

  • Page 980

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 980 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Status = 6: The WZV job has been completed. This status has the same function as status 1, but, in addition, a reservation of the source location is carried out...

  • Page 981

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 981 Call example CALL FC 8( //Tool-management transfer block Start := m 20.5, //Start := "1 " => transfer trigger TaskIdent := DB61.DBB 0, TaskId...

  • Page 982

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 982 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 For the purpose of job processing, every FC ASUB requires its own WORD parameter "Ref" from the global user memory area. This parameter is for interna...

  • Page 983

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 983 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark StartErr O BOOL 1 = Interrupt number not assigned or deleted Ref I/O WORD Global variable (MW, DBW,..) 1 word per FC 9 ...

  • Page 984

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 984 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.18 FC 10: AL_MSG error and operating messages Function FC AL_MSG evaluates the signals entered in DB 2 and displays them as incoming and outgoing error a...

  • Page 985

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 985 FB 1-Parameter "ExtendAlMsg" With the activation of the parameter a new structuring of the DB 2 becomes effective (see 831,"Interface PLC/HMI (P...

  • Page 986

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 986 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.19 FC 12: AUXFU call interface for user with auxiliary functions Function FC AUXFU is generally called on an eventdriven basis in the basic program if the...

  • Page 987

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 987 TO DB[ChanDB]; //Channel DB is opened indirectly // Auxiliary-function change signals are now scanned, etc. BE; END_FUNCTION 12.16.20 FC 13: BHGDisp Display c...

  • Page 988

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 988 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Additional parameters HHU The pointer parameters for the input and output data of the handheld unit must be parameterized in the start OB 100 in FB 1, DB 7. Par...

  • Page 989

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 989 FUNCTION FC 13 : VOID VAR INPUT Row : BYTE ; //Display line (see table) ChrArray : STRING ; //Transfer at least string[32/64] Convert : BOOL; //Activate nu...

  • Page 990

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 990 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Value range Remark 4: WORD, 5 characters 5: INT, 6 characters 6: DWORD, 7 characters 7: DINT, 8 characters 8: REAL, 9 characters (7 digits plus...

  • Page 991

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 991 Ranges of values of data types Data type Representable numerical range REAL (Digits := 1) - 999999.9 to + 999999.9 REAL (Digits := 2) - 99999.99 to + 99999.99 R...

  • Page 992

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 992 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Step 3: The other contactor is energized after the time period set by the user in parameter "TimeVal" has elapsed. Step 4: After a further delay, the ...

  • Page 993

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 993 Boundary conditions Star-delta changeover on digital main spindle drives initiates a process, which contains closed-loop control sequences. Since the closed-loo...

  • Page 994

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 994 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Value range Comment Delta O BOOL Energizing of delta contactor Ref I/O WORD Instance for status information Internal use Call example CALL F...

  • Page 995

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 995 On completion ("InPos" is TRUE, "Start" changes to zero), the axis/spindle check function is switched to a neutral status by FC "SpinCt...

  • Page 996

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 996 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Functions 1. Position spindle: The following signals are relevant: Start: Initiation signal Funct: "1" = Position spindle Mode: Positioning mode 1, 2...

  • Page 997

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 997 MD35010 $MA_GEAR_STEP_ CHANGE_ENABLE = 0 Function MD35010 $MA_GEAR_STEP_ CHANGE_ENABLE = 1 Function Pos = 0 Oscillating Pos = 0 Pos = 1 Oscillating Pos = 1 Os...

  • Page 998

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 998 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 5. to 8. Position axes: The following signals are relevant: Start: Initiation signal Funct: "5 to 8" = Position axes Mode: Positioning mode 0, 1, 2, ...

  • Page 999

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 999 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 18: VOID //SpinCtrl VAR_INPUT Start: BOOL; Stop: BOOL; Funct: BYTE ; Mode: BYTE ; AxisNo: INT; Pos: REAL; FRate: REAL;...

  • Page 1000

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1000 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Range of values Remark AxisNo I INT 1 - 31 No. of axis/spindle to be traversed Pos I REAL ∓ 0.1469368 I -38 to ∓ 0.1701412 I +39 Rotary a...

  • Page 1001

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1001 State Meaning (corresponds to alarm number 16770) 106 B#16#6a Positioning process of the axis still active (corresponds to alarm number 22052) 107 B#16#6b Refe...

  • Page 1002

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1002 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Pulse diagram (1) Activation of function by means of a positive signal edge with start or stop (2) Positive acknowledgement: Function executed / Position rea...

  • Page 1003

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1003 Call examples 1. Position spindle: //Positive acknowledgement resets Start: U M112.0; //InPos R M 100.0; //Start //Negative acknowledgement, after error evalu...

  • Page 1004

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1004 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3. Start spindle oscillation: CALL FC 18( Start := M100.0, Stop := FALSE, Funct := B#16#3, //Oscillate spindle Mode := B#16#0, Axis...

  • Page 1005

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1005 12.16.23 FC 19: MCP_IFM transmission of MCP signals to interface Function With the FC MCP_IFM (M-variant) from the machine control panel a range of 19 inches,...

  • Page 1006

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1006 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The second machine control panel can be processed if parameter "ModeGroupNo" has been increased by B#16#10. When parameterizing, the HHU number is co...

  • Page 1007

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1007 Example More than nine axes are to be controlled with FC19 using a special application. We recommend that you proceed as follows: ● Reserve free key on MCP. ...

  • Page 1008

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1008 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MCP selection signals to the user interface Table 12- 1 Key switch Source: MCP - Switch Destination: Interface DB Position 0 DB10.DBX56.4 Position 1 DB10.DBX...

  • Page 1009

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1009 Source: MCP - Key Destination: Interface DB (all axis DBs) Direction key + DB31, ... .DBX4.7 Direction key - DB31, ... .DBX4.6 Rapid traverse override DB31,...

  • Page 1010

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1010 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Checkback signals from user interface for controlling displays Table 12- 7 Operating modes and machine functions Destination: MCP - LED Source: Interface DB (p...

  • Page 1011

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1011 SpindleHold := db2.dbx151.0); //Spindle stop modal in //message DB With these parameter settings, the signals are sent to the first mode group, the first cha...

  • Page 1012

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1012 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Declaration of the function STL representation VAR_INPUT Enable : BOOL ; Funct: BYTE ; S7Var : ANY ; IVar1 : INT ; IVar2 : INT ; END_VAR VAR_...

  • Page 1013

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1013 Function 1, 2: Signals synchronized actions to / from Channel Synchronized actions can be disabled or enabled by the PLC. The data area is stored on the user ...

  • Page 1014

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1014 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Enable := M 10.0, //if TRUE, FC 21 active Funct := MB 11, S7Var := #myAny, //Not used IVAR1 := 1, //Channel no. IVAR2 := 0, Error := M 10.1, ErrCode...

  • Page 1015

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1015 Data exchange with semaphore in PLC (schematic of FC21) Basic structure in NCK:

  • Page 1016

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1016 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Variable value ranges The following signals are relevant: Signal Type Type Value range Comment Enable I BOOL = FC 21 active 3: Read data Funct I BYTE 3, 4 4:...

  • Page 1017

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1017 CALL FC 21 ( Enable := M 10.0, //if TRUE, FC 21 active Funct := B#16#3, //Read data S7Var := P#M 100.0 DWORD 1, IVAR1 := 4, IVAR2 := 0, Error := M...

  • Page 1018

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1018 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal Type Type Value range Comment IVAR1 I INT 1. Max. channel Channel number Error O BOOL 1: "Funct" invalid ErrCode O INT 10: Channel no. inv...

  • Page 1019

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1019 12.16.25 FC 22: TM_DIR Direction selection for tool management Function The block TM_DIR provides the shortest path for positioning a magazine or a revolver ba...

  • Page 1020

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1020 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 VAR_OUTPUT Cw: BOOL ; Ccw: BOOL ; InPos: BOOL ; Diff: INT; Error : BOOL ; END_VAR BEGIN END_FUNCTION Description of formal parameters The table below show...

  • Page 1021

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1021 12.16.26 FC 24: MCP_IFM2 transmission of MCP signals to interface Function With FC MCP_IFM2 (M variant slimline machine control panel, e.g. MCP 310), the foll...

  • Page 1022

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1022 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Multiple calls of FC 24 or FC 19, FC 25, FC 26 are permitted in a single PLC cycle. In this case, the first call in the cycle drives the LED displays. Furtherm...

  • Page 1023

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1023 For FC 24, the maximum possible number of axis selections can also be restricted. This upper limit is set for the first machine control panel in DB10.DBW30 (s...

  • Page 1024

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1024 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Call example CALL FC 24( //Slimline machine control panel M variants //Signals to interface BAGNo := B#16#1, //Mode group no. 1 ChanNo := B#16#1, //Channel...

  • Page 1025

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1025 The associated LEDs on the machine control panel derived from the acknowledgements of the relevant selections. Feedrate and spindle Start/Stop are not transfer...

  • Page 1026

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1026 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Declaration of the function FUNCTION FC 25: VOID // NAME: MCP_IFT VAR_INPUT BAGNo : BYTE ; ChanNo: BYTE ; SpindleIFNo: BYTE ; END_VAR VAR_OUTPUT Fee...

  • Page 1027

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1027 12.16.28 FC 26: HPU_MCP transmission of HT8 signals to interface Function declaration FUNCTION FC 26: VOID // NAME: HPU_MCP VAR_INPUT BAGNo : BYTE ; ChanNo...

  • Page 1028

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1028 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Call of the FC 26 for the second MCP, the second mode group and the third channel of the NC. CALL FC 26( //Machine control panel of HT8 BAGNo := B#16#12, //2...

  • Page 1029

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1029 The table length can be specified to the FC 26: ● 1st MCP: DB10.DBB30 (upper limit of the machine axis table) ● 2nd MCP: DB10.DBB54 (upper limit of the mac...

  • Page 1030

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1030 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 No traversing of machine axes in WCS In case of active WCS (AB n + 0, Bit 0 = 1) the traversing of the machine axes can be locked. For this, the following outp...

  • Page 1031

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1031 The selection signals of the INC machine functions are transferred in the mode group-specific interface DB11 DBB 2 + (n * 20), Bit 0 to Bit 5 (with n = 0, 1, 2...

  • Page 1032

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1032 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.28.1 Overview of the NC/PLC interface signals of HT 8 Operating modes and machine functions Source: MCP Destination: Programmed mode group (Parameter BA...

  • Page 1033

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1033 Override Source: MCP Aim: Programmed channel (Parameter: ChanNo) Feed override DB21, ... .DBB4 Source: MCP Aim: Prog. axes corresponding to the table in DB ...

  • Page 1034

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1034 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.29 FC 19, FC 24, FC 25, FC 26 source code description Task Machine control panel to application interface (FC 19 M variant, FC 24 slim variant, FC 25 T v...

  • Page 1035

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1035 MCS/WCS switchover with edge evaluation, axis selections, direction keys and rapid traverse overlay is determined in the Global_IN network for further processi...

  • Page 1036

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions 1036 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.16.30 FC 1005: AG_SEND transfers data to Ethernet CP Function The FC block AG_SEND transfers data to the Ethernet CP for transfer via a configured connecti...

  • Page 1037

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.16 Block descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1037 12.16.31 FC 1006: AG_RECV receives data from the Ethernet CP Function The FC block AG_RECV receives data transferred via a configured connection from the Ether...

  • Page 1038

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.17 Signal/data descriptions Basic Functions 1038 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.17 Signal/data descriptions 12.17.1 Interface signals NCK/PLC, HMI/PLC, MCP/PLC References The NCK/PLC, HMI/PLC and MCP/PLC interface signals are cont...

  • Page 1039

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.17 Signal/data descriptions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1039 Address in DB 21, ... Variable Type Comment DBX 204.0 ... 7 M_Fkt_M80 ... M87 BOOL M signals M80 ... M87 DBX 205.0 ... 7 M_Fkt_M88 ... M95 BOOL M signals...

  • Page 1040

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.17 Signal/data descriptions Basic Functions 1040 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Address in DB 21, ... Variables Type Basic position Comment DBB 212 G_FKT_GR_5 BYTE 0 Active G function of group 5 DBB 213 G_FKT_GR_6 BYTE 0 Active G fun...

  • Page 1041

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1041 12.17.4 Message signals in DB 2 DB 2 allows the user to display the messages for individual signals on the operator panel. As the lists of interface ...

  • Page 1042

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions 1042 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Code Comment LAR2 P#50.0; //Destination start address on data byte 50 //AR1, AR2, DB, DI loaded beforehand L 4; //Transfer 8 bytes M001: L D...

  • Page 1043

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1043 Code Comment dbchr : WORD ; Number: WORD ; type : BYTE ; END_VAR BEGIN NETWORK TITLE = //POINTER L P##Addr; LAR1 ; //Retrieve pointe...

  • Page 1044

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions 1044 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Code Comment FUNCTIONBLOCK FB 99 VAR_INPUT Row : BYTE ; Convert : BOOL ; //Activate numerical conversion Addr: POINTER; //Points to...

  • Page 1045

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1045 12.18.2.3 POINTER or ANY variable for transfer to FC or FB POINTER or ANY variable With version 1 or later of STEP 7 it is possible to define a point...

  • Page 1046

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions 1046 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Code Comment +AR2; //Add ANY start addresses L P##Temp_addr; LAR1 ; //Retrieve pointer from VAR_TEMP L DID [AR2,P#0.0]; //Transfer pointer value ...

  • Page 1047

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1047 Code Comment SLD 3; //Offset is a bit offset T LD [AR1,P#6.0]; CALL FB 101, DB 100 (ANYPAR := #Temp_addr); //ANYPAR is data type ANY 12.18.3 Mult...

  • Page 1048

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions 1048 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Code Comment variable2: INT ; END_VAR BEGIN L P##variable1; //Pointer at start of ARRAY //The value 8500 0010 is now in the accumulator //an...

  • Page 1049

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1049 12.18.5 Determining offset addresses for data block structures Function Another task, which occurs frequently, is symbolic determination of an offset...

  • Page 1050

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.18 Programming tips with STEP 7 Basic Functions 1050 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Parameterization of FB 2 with instance DB 110 The following example shows how a useful distribution in OB 100 and OB 1 portion is to be imple...

  • Page 1051

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.19 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1051 The savings of this variant: The cyclic copying effort of 3 integer values and 4 ANY parameters with respect to the instance DB, which results from 3 time loading of a...

  • Page 1052

    P3: Basic PLC program for SINUMERIK 840D sl 12.19 Data lists Basic Functions 1052 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 12.19.1.3 Channelspecific machine data Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 28150 MM_NUM_VDIVAR_ELEMENTS Number of elements for writing PLC variables

  • Page 1053

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1053 P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 1313.1 Overview 13.1.1 PLC firmware The PLC of the SINUMERIK 828D is an integrated PLC based on the SIMATIC S7-200 command set. The PLC user program is essentially programmed using a Windows PC with the...

  • Page 1054

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.1 Overview Basic Functions 1054 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 13-1 Overview of the user interface of the PLC 828D

  • Page 1055

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.1 Overview Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1055 13.1.2.1 Data that are cyclically exchanged Data which is exchanged between the PLC and NC on one side as well as between the PLC and HMI on the other side. Data to the PLC are provided b...

  • Page 1056

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.1 Overview Basic Functions 1056 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.1.2.4 Non-retentive data Non-retentive data (e.g. bit memories, timers and counters) are deleted every time the control is booted. 13.1.2.5 PLC machine data The PLC machine data are in...

  • Page 1057

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.2 PLC Programming Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1057 13.1.4 PLC I/O, fast onboard inputs/outputs For information on the properties of the rapid onboard inputs/outputs and their response times, see Section " 1064,Fast on-boa...

  • Page 1058

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1058 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 References: Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK 828D When calling the PLC Programming Tool – without specifying an existing project – then implicitly a new project is created with the &...

  • Page 1059

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1059 Data classes Data classes are especially the properties of actual values of such data blocks that the user explicitly brings into the project. (Data blocks that are inherent to the sys...

  • Page 1060

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1060 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 13-2 Example of a project structure Symbol tables The symbol table is used for symbolic addresses. Frequently, symbols simplify programming and increase the transparency of pro...

  • Page 1061

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1061 Cross references The following are displayed in tabular form in the cross reference window: ● The symbolic or absolute addresses and the locations where they are used ● The bytes t...

  • Page 1062

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1062 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.3.1.3 Program organization using the the Programming Tool The PLC Programming Tool organizes your program in the Program Editor in individual tabs per POU. As standard, when creatin...

  • Page 1063

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1063 Interrupt programs Interrupt programs are used to be able to handle special process conditions or requirements. The PLC828 makes a differentiation as follows: Condition Program Descri...

  • Page 1064

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1064 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.3.1.4 Fast on-board inputs and outputs The PLC of the PPU module can use eight rapid inputs and six rapid outputs that are provided "onboard" via the connectors X242 (DIN1...

  • Page 1065

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1065 Response times This results in the following response times depending on the position control cycle, place of execution and used digital inputs/outputs: Position control cycle clock 1...

  • Page 1066

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1066 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.3.2.2 Addressing range of the target system Address range of a memory type is the addressing range for this type of memory that spans the lowest and highest possible address numbers...

  • Page 1067

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1067 Access method Type of memory Min. and max. address numbersUser interface DB 1000 - 7999 3) User data blocks DB 9000 - 9063 3) Special data blocks DB 9900 - 9999 3) 1) Range of the pr...

  • Page 1068

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1068 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 User interface is an interface comprising data blocks that the firmware creates on the target system. It is used to exchange data between the PLC on one side and the NCK and HMI on the...

  • Page 1069

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1069 Absolute and symbolic addressing You can specify the addresses in the operations in your program either absolutely or symbolically. An absolute address specifies the memory type and t...

  • Page 1070

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1070 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 However, if you refer to INPUT1 at another location in the program (e.g. in MAIN or in a second program), the program editor does not recognize INPUT1 as a local variable and treats IN...

  • Page 1071

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1071 The operations and parameterized subprograms are recognized using a precise definition. This definition is also called signature. For all standardized operations, the data types permis...

  • Page 1072

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1072 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 User-defined data types Equivalent data type BOOL BOOL BYTE BYTE WORD WORD, INT INT WORD, INT DWORD DWORD, INT DINT DWORD, DINT REAL REAL 2. No data check This mode is only available f...

  • Page 1073

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1073 Working with operations to convert the data type Conversion operations convert one data type into another. The PLC Programming Tool supports the following conversion commands to transf...

  • Page 1074

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1074 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Examples of binary constants Example Numerical basis Separator Constant 2#1101 2 # 1101 Examples of hexadecimal constants: Example Numerical basis Separator Constant 16#3FB3 16 # 3FB...

  • Page 1075

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1075 Data block properties A data block is a block for data (initial values, actual values) and comments with the following properties: ● The data is saved in precisely the same sequence ...

  • Page 1076

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1076 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Editing data blocks in the PLC Programming Tool To edit data blocks in the PLC Programming Tool: ● In the navigation bar, click the "Data block" button. ● Select the &quo...

  • Page 1077

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1077 Example: The structure of the data block in the project must match the structure of the data block in the target system. If you have modified the structure of the data block, or re-c...

  • Page 1078

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1078 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Accepting initial values If you accept the initial values, then all of the actual values of a data block are overwritten. If you haven't selected an initial value for a variable, then ...

  • Page 1079

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1079

  • Page 1080

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1080 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Direct addressing for data blocks ● Absolute addressing The direct, absolute address of the variables in their data block number comprises the absolute input from the number of the d...

  • Page 1081

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1081 Indirect addressing for data blocks You may be able to simplify the programming if data blocks with the same structure are used in your program. You can indirectly address the data blo...

  • Page 1082

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1082 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 You can easily edit your data block in this way, e.g. in Microsoft Excel. Using special data blocks The PLC Programming Tool offers you the possibility of using special data blocks fo...

  • Page 1083

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1083 Resolving errors The PLC Programming Tool marks errors made when data is being entered (e.g. in the LAD Editor, the NC variables or the symbol table). For example, an illegal syntax or...

  • Page 1084

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1084 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● After making changes to the actual values of a data block, these must then be subsequently loaded into the target system. The structure of the data block in the target system must...

  • Page 1085

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1085 Loading a data block from the target system Here, reference is made to Section " 1089,Data classes (Pa 1089,ge 1089)" in which loading and saving (not only data blocks) is ex...

  • Page 1086

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1086 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.3.2.7 Special bit memories and their functions Special bit memories SMB0 (SM0.0 ... SM0.6) contain seven bits that are updated by the PLC firmware at the end of each cycle. You can ...

  • Page 1087

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1087 Selecting an NC variable The "NC variables" variables list is divided into two areas. The upper area shows the NC variables or the drive parameters of the selected variables ...

  • Page 1088

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1088 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameterizing a selected NC variable The selected NC variable does not yet have any complete addressing and must be parameterized. For example, the channel or axis number as well as t...

  • Page 1089

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1089 Note If the list of the selected NC variables is changed, a new compilation is required so that the DB9910 data block can be updated. The compilation is performed automatically for &...

  • Page 1090

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1090 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ① Load into CPU ② Load from CPU ③ Open Project ④ Save project (under) Figure 13-5 Project structure in the PLC Programming Tools and the structure of the data class transport...

  • Page 1091

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1091 From the user's perspective, there are three data classes: ● Manufacturer: – POUs (MAIN, all subprograms and the interrupt program INT0); – The data blocks: Internal structure (t...

  • Page 1092

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1092 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.3.4.2 Assigning a block to a data class A data block is assigned to a data class in its property dialog box. Procedure 1. In the operation tree, right click on the corresponding blo...

  • Page 1093

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1093 13.3.4.3 Load data class(es) into the CPU Procedure 1. In the window "Load into CPU", select the data class(es) whose blocks are to be loaded: 2. Select the option "Blo...

  • Page 1094

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1094 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4. Select one of the following options in the message window "Load into CPU": – "Bring target system into the stop condition" → If structurally modified program...

  • Page 1095

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1095 13.3.4.4 Load data class(es) from CPU Procedure 1. In the window "Load from CPU", select the data class(es) whose blocks are to be loaded: 2. Select the option "Blocks ...

  • Page 1096

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1096 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.3.4.5 Comparison between online and offline projects The data classes, whose blocks are to be compared, can be selected in the dialog box "Compare..."(menu "Target sy...

  • Page 1097

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1097 13.3.4.6 Delete in the target system Delete is only permitted in the "STOP" operating state. Deleting "Manufacturer" results in a start error at the transition into...

  • Page 1098

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions 1098 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Procedure Use the dialog box "rewire", to rewire addresses: Please proceed as follows: 1. Open the dialog box "Rewire" in the LAD editor using the context menu (&q...

  • Page 1099

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.3 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1099 3. Enter the old and the new addresses for rewiring in the "Replacements" list. Permitted addresses include: – Inputs – Outputs – Bit memory – Special bit memory – ...

  • Page 1100

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1100 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 4. Select or deselect the option "All accesses within the specified addresses". If the option is enabled, then the addresses ranges (BYTE, WORD, DWORD) are ...

  • Page 1101

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1101 13.4.1.1 Status definition "Status" refers to the display of the actual values of addresses while executing the program in the target system. You can displa...

  • Page 1102

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1102 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.1.2 Preconditions of the status update Before you can update the status to monitor and test your program, you must execute the following tasks: ● Your program ...

  • Page 1103

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1103 13.4.1.5 Status update Program status in LAD If you monitor the program status in the program editor in LAD, the status is updated at the end of each cycle. If an add...

  • Page 1104

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1104 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.2 Program status in the LAD program editor 13.4.2.1 Display program status Note If, in the STOP mode, you have loaded a program into the target system, you mus...

  • Page 1105

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1105 Note If you have problems when enabling the program status, please consider the following prerequisites: • You must have set up communication (so that you can load...

  • Page 1106

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1106 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.2.3 Display properties The program status can be executed for CPUs in the execution status mode and for all CPUs in the end-of-scan status mode. For information ...

  • Page 1107

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1107 13.4.2.4 Execution status Function If the execution status is activated for the program status, the status values at the time of execution of the operations of a prog...

  • Page 1108

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1108 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Color settings Property Default color The busbar is marked in color if the program is being scanned. The signal flow in the diagrams is color-coded. The command is c...

  • Page 1109

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1109 View example in the end-of-scan status: Color settings Property Default color Contacts and coils are marked in color if they are live or logically true. Blue User c...

  • Page 1110

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1110 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note The color marking for "Signal flow" does not mean that there is always a signal flow! In the program status in LAD, the values are only displayed at ...

  • Page 1111

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1111 13.4.2.7 Adapting the program status display Adapting the program status display in the program editor Procedure: 1. Select the "Tools > Options" menu co...

  • Page 1112

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1112 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Adapting the arrangement of the window in the PLC Programming Tool In order to create more space for the window of the program editor, or to be able to display it wit...

  • Page 1113

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1113 Opening / enabling a status chart Opening a status chart is not the same as enabling a status chart. You can open and evaluate or change a status chart: However, if y...

  • Page 1114

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1114 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.3.2 Open status chart Open a status chart to evaluate or change the contents of the chart. Procedure ● Click on the button "Status chart" in the navi...

  • Page 1115

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1115 Displaying hidden tabs Sometimes, a tab is hidden by the buttons on the righthand side that are used to scroll. If a tab cannot be seen, proceed as follows: ● Drag ...

  • Page 1116

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1116 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.3.5 Editing the status chart Displays To scroll through the possible data formats for a specific address: • Select the field "Data format" and repea...

  • Page 1117

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1117 Delete To delete a field or a row: 1. Select the field or the row and click with the right mouse button. 2. Select the menu command "Delete" > "Sel...

  • Page 1118

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions 1118 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.4.3.7 Enabling the status table Enable the status chart so that the status information can be updated. Procedure If you wish to continually update the status infor...

  • Page 1119

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.4 Test and diagnostic functions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1119 13.4.4 Execute cycles You can specify that the target system should process a certain number of cycles of your program (from 1 cycle up to 65535 cycles). If you speci...

  • Page 1120

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.5 Data interface Basic Functions 1120 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.5 Data interface Data is cyclically exchanged on one hand between the PLC and NC and and on the other hand between the PLC and HMI. This especially means that the data received f...

  • Page 1121

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.5 Data interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1121 13.5.1.2 NC channel signals DB2500, 3200, 3300, 3500 The signals are structured as follows: ● Control/status signals with normal cyclic transfer, see " 1120,Mode signals (Pag...

  • Page 1122

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.5 Data interface Basic Functions 1122 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.5.1.3 Axis and spindle signals DB3200, 3300, 3700, 3800, 3900 The axis-specific and spindle-specific signals are divided into the following groups: ● Shared axis/spindle signal...

  • Page 1123

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.5 Data interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1123 13.5.1.4 General NCK signals DB2600, 2700, 2800, 2900, 4500, 5300 ● Setpoints to digital/analog inputs/outputs of the NCK ● Actual values from the digital/analog inputs/outputs ...

  • Page 1124

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.5 Data interface Basic Functions 1124 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.5.1.5 Fast data exchange PLC-NCK DB4900 Data block DB4900 with a size of 1024 bytes is used for fast information exchange between the PLC and NCK. The assignment of the area (str...

  • Page 1125

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1125 13.6 Function interface 13.6.1 Read/write NC variables 13.6.1.1 User interface The PLC user program can read or write a maximum of eight NC variables simultaneously via the NC/P...

  • Page 1126

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1126 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB120x 1) Reading/writing NC data (PLC → NCK) DBB1027 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Write: Data to NC variable x 3) 1) DB120x, with x = 0 ... 7 corresponds to variable 1 ... 8...

  • Page 1127

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1127 13.6.1.3 Job management: Start job The following data must be written by the user to the global job interface: DB120x 1) Reading/writing NC data (PLC → NCK) Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 ...

  • Page 1128

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1128 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Possible error causes ● Number of variables (DB1200.DBB1) out of the valid range ● Variable index (DB1200.DBB1000) out of the valid range ● Simultaneous reading/writing of...

  • Page 1129

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1129 ④ Waiting for end of job: DB1200.DBX2000.0 (job completed) == 0 AND DB1200.DBX2000.1 (error in job) == 1 ⇒ Perform error handling ⇒ Reset job request: DB1200.DBX0.0 (sta...

  • Page 1130

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1130 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Channel-specific variables When reading/writing channel-specific variables, only the variables of exactly one channel may be addressed in a job. Drive-specific variables ...

  • Page 1131

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1131 13.6.1.8 Operable variables Variable cuttEdgeParam Compensation value parameters and cutting edge list with D numbers for a tool The meanings of the individual parameters depend...

  • Page 1132

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1132 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Variable linShift Translation of a settable work offset (channel-specific settable frames) They only exist if MD18601 MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0. There are the frame indic...

  • Page 1133

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1133 Variable numMachAxes Number of the highest existing channel axis If there are no gaps between channels, this corresponds to the number of existing axes in the channel. Variabl...

  • Page 1134

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1134 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Variable actLineNumber [r] DB120x.DBW1004 - DB120x.DBD1008 - DB120x.DBW3004 Read: Data from NCK variable x (data type of the variables: INT) Variable magazine data: Location da...

  • Page 1135

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1135 T No. of tool at this location ($TC_MPP6) T number of the tool at this location: $TC_MPP6 Address Description Valid values DB120x.DBB1000 Variables index 9 DB120x.DBB1001 - - D...

  • Page 1136

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1136 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Variable r0081 CO: Torque utilization in percent Variable r0081 [r] DB120x.DBB1000 12 DB120x.DBB1001 Number of the drive module DB120x.DBW1002 - DB120x.DBW1004 - DB120x.DBD100...

  • Page 1137

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1137 Variable TEMP_COMP_SLOPE (SD43910) Gradient for position-dependent temperature compensation Variable TEMP_COMP_SLOPE [r/w] DB120x.DBB1000 15 DB120x.DBB1001 No. of the axis (...

  • Page 1138

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1138 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.1.9 Specifying selected NC variables The selected NC variables are specified via the DB9910 data block (selected NC variable). The length of the data block depends on the n...

  • Page 1139

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1139 Extended user interface The data test in data blocks means the value of a variable can be written to an address in the data block that has the same type, e.g. a REAL value can b...

  • Page 1140

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1140 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 PI index DB1200.DBB4001 specifies the specific PI service. PI parameter n From DB1200.DBW4004, PI parameter n must be specified for the specific service. Start DB1200.DBX4000.1 ...

  • Page 1141

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1141 PI services: Cycle diagram ① User sets the signal "Start", job execution starts. ② After the PLC firmware signals "Job completed", the user resets the s...

  • Page 1142

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1142 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 PI service: ASUB Address Description Valid values DB1200.DBW4001 PI index 1, 2 DB1200.DBW4004 LIFTFAST 0, 1 DB1200.DBW4006 BLSYNC 0, 1 PI index Function Interrupt priority 1 ...

  • Page 1143

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1143 PI service TMMVTL Function Using the PI service TMMVTL, it is possible to initiate a job from the PLC to relocate a tool. After an error-free PI start, the TM executes an empty ...

  • Page 1144

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1144 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.3 PLC user alarms 13.6.3.1 User interface Note Although the name user "alarms" is used in the following, it is only defined as to whether it involves a message ...

  • Page 1145

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1145 Variables interface of the user alarms Each user alarm can be given a variable as parameter. One double word each is reserved for this purpose in the variable interface from off...

  • Page 1146

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1146 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB1600 Active alarm response [r] DBB 2002 DBB 2003 One bit is set if for at least one active alarm the corresponding response or the corresponding cancel criterion is configu...

  • Page 1147

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1147 Acknowledgement interface of the user alarms Requirement Requirement to acknowledge a user alarm is that the corresponding activation bit is reset. ● Messages with cancel crit...

  • Page 1148

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1148 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.4 PLC axis control 13.6.4.1 Overview Target The PLC can control eight axes or spindles via data blocks of the user interface; the axis/spindle is specified by its DB number...

  • Page 1149

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1149 Axis disable With the axis disable set, an axis controlled via PLC axis control will not move. Only a simulated actual value is generated. (Behavior as with NC programming). 13....

  • Page 1150

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1150 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Request and relinquish PLC axis 13.6.4.3 User interface: Functionality The two tables provide an overview of the available interface signals. The precise description of the sig...

  • Page 1151

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1151 DB3800...3807 Signals to PLC axis [r/w] DBB3003 Indexing position - - - - - Distance condition, abs. pos. direction (ACP) Distance condition, abs. neg. direction (ACN) DBD3004 P...

  • Page 1152

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1152 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.4.4 Spindle positioning DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002.0 Incremental 0|1 DBX3002.1 Shortest path 0|1 DBX3003.0 Absolute, negative direction...

  • Page 1153

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1153 ① Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start. ② Positioning axis active message shows that the function is active and that the output signals are valid, Posit...

  • Page 1154

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1154 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3000.5 Start spindle rotation 0|1 DBX3001.5 Stop spindle rotation 0|1 DB390x NCK → PLC status signals Remark DBX3...

  • Page 1155

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1155 13.6.4.6 Oscillate spindle DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002.0 Incremental 0 DBX3002.1 Shortest distance 0 DBX3002.5 Direction of rotation as for M...

  • Page 1156

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1156 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ① Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start. Note: This is only possible when the Positioning axis active signal is reset! ② Signals Positioning axis active ...

  • Page 1157

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1157 DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBD3008 Feedrate velocity REAL if = 0, the value is taken from machine data POS_AX_VELO (unit as set in machine data). DBX...

  • Page 1158

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1158 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.4.8 Positioning axis metric DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002.0 Incremental 0|1 DBX3002.1 Shortest distance 0|1 DBX3002.5 Direction of rotatio...

  • Page 1159

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1159 ① First function activation using positive edge of Start. ② Positioning axis active = 1 shows that the function is active and that the output signals are valid, Position re...

  • Page 1160

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1160 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3000.7 Start positioning axis 0|1 Reset does not result in a stop! DBX2.2 Delete distance-to-go, spindle reset 0|1 Inte...

  • Page 1161

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1161 13.6.4.10 Positioning axis metric with handwheel override DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002.0 Incremental 0|1 DBX3002.1 Shortest distance 0|1 DBX30...

  • Page 1162

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1162 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ① First function activation using positive edge of Start. ② Positioning axis active = 1 shows that the function is active and that the output signals are valid, Position re...

  • Page 1163

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1163 DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3000.7 Start positioning axis 0|1 Reset does not result in a stop! DBX2.2 Delete distance-to-go, spindle reset 0|1 Inte...

  • Page 1164

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1164 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.4.12 Rotate spindle with automatic gear stage selection DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002.0 Incremental 0 DBX3002.1 Shortest distance 0 DBX300...

  • Page 1165

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1165 ① Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start. ② Signals Positioning axis active and Position reached are signaled back, Position reached is in this case irrel...

  • Page 1166

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1166 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB390x NCK → PLC status signals Remark DBX3000.7 Positioning axes active 1: for start or stop == 1, DBX3000.6 Position reached 1: Setpoint speed is output DBX3000.1 Error 1:...

  • Page 1167

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1167 13.6.4.14 Rotate spindle with constant cutting rate [feet/min] DB380x PLC → NCK control signals Valid values Remark DBX3002.0 Incremental 0 DBX3002.1 Shortest distance 0 DBX3...

  • Page 1168

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1168 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ① Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start. ② Signals Positioning axis active and Position reached are signaled back, Position reached is in this case irrel...

  • Page 1169

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1169 Error number Decimal Hex Meaning 50 32 Permanently assigned PLC axis: Traverses (JOG) or is referencing 60 3C Permanently assigned PLC axis: Channel status does not permit a sta...

  • Page 1170

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1170 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.5 Starting ASUBs 13.6.5.1 General An ASUB (asynchronous subprogram) is an NC program that can be started by the PLC at any time, i.e. it is an NC interrupt program, because...

  • Page 1171

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1171 13.6.5.3 Job result DB3400 ASUB: Result [r] NCK → PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INT1 DBB 1000 ASUB cannot be executed 1) Interrupt n...

  • Page 1172

    P4: PLC for SINUMERIK 828D 13.6 Function interface Basic Functions 1172 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 13.6.5.4 Signal flow Signal flow ① Function activated by user with a positive edge of Start. ② ASUB is being executed is signaled back. ③ The acknowledgement ASUB complet...

  • Page 1173

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1173 R1: Referencing 1414.1 Brief Description Function The "Reference Point Approach" function is used to synchronize the measuring system of a machine axis with machine zero. The machine axis is traversed to machine zero an...

  • Page 1174

    R1: Referencing 14.2 Axisspecific referencing Basic Functions 1174 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Start The reference point approach of a machine axis can be started manually or via the part program: ● Manual: Operation mode JOG and MDA, machine function REF ● Part program: P...

  • Page 1175

    R1: Referencing 14.2 Axisspecific referencing Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1175 Jog mode The following machine data element can be used to specify whether reference point approach is completed when the direction key is pressed once or whether the operator is req...

  • Page 1176

    R1: Referencing 14.3 Channelspecific referencing Basic Functions 1176 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Cancellation of reference point approach In axis-specific reference point approach, the machine axis is traversed in the channel that was assigned as the master channel of the mac...

  • Page 1177

    R1: Referencing 14.3 Channelspecific referencing Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1177 Simultaneous reference point approach of several machine axes Several machine axes can be referenced simultaneously, depending on the control: SINUMERIK 840D: Max. 8 machine axes...

  • Page 1178

    R1: Referencing 14.4 Reference point appraoch from part program (G74) Basic Functions 1178 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.4 Reference point appraoch from part program (G74) Referencing of machine axes can be activated for the first time or repeated from the part program Refere...

  • Page 1179

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1179 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems 14.5.1 Hardware signals Depending on the machine design and the properties of the incremental measuring ...

  • Page 1180

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions 1180 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 References ● NCU interfaces: SINUMERIK 840D sl Manual, NCU7x0.3 PN, Section "Connecting" > "Digital I/Os" ● Drive parameters: SINA...

  • Page 1181

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1181 14.5.3 Time sequence Reference point approach with incremental measuring systems can be divided into three phases: ● Phase 1: " 1182,Phase 1: Travers...

  • Page 1182

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions 1182 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.5.4 Phase 1: Traversing to the reference cam Phase 1: Graphic representation Figure 14-3 Phase 1: Traversing to the reference cam Phase 1: Start To start ...

  • Page 1183

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1183 ● MD34010 $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (approach reference point in minus direction) ● MD34020 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM (reference point approach velocity) ...

  • Page 1184

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions 1184 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Phase 1: Properties ● Feed override active. ● Feed stop (channel-specific and axis-specific) is active. ● NC stop and NC start are active. ● The machi...

  • Page 1185

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1185 Phase 2: Start Phase 2 is automatically started when Phase 1 has been completed without an alarm. Initial situation: The machine axis is positioned on the ref...

  • Page 1186

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions 1186 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 14-6 Synchronization with falling reference cam edge Case 2: Synchronization with rising reference cam edge During synchronization with rising referen...

  • Page 1187

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1187 Electronic reference cam shift The electronic reference cam shift is used to compensate for expansions of the reference cam caused by temperature so that sync...

  • Page 1188

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions 1188 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Dynamic response The following factors influence the dynamic response from the arrival of the reference cam to the machine up to the detection of reference ca...

  • Page 1189

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1189 ● NC stop and NC start are not active. ● If the machine axis does not arrive at Phase 2 within the parameterized distance of the reference mark (encoder z...

  • Page 1190

    R1: Referencing 14.5 Referencing with incremental measurement systems Basic Functions 1190 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Phase 3: Sequence The machine axis moves at the assigned reference point positioning velocity: MD34070 $MA_REFP_VELO_POS (reference point positioning velocity...

  • Page 1191

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1191 Special feature of Phase 3 In the following cases, the machine axis stops first after detection of the zero mark and then traverses back to the reference point...

  • Page 1192

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions 1192 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.6.2 Basic parameter assignment Linear measuring systems. The following data must be set to parameterize linear measuring systems: ● The absolute offset be...

  • Page 1193

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1193 4. Measure the current position of the machine axis with reference to the machine zero point. 5. Calculate absolute offset and enter in MD34090. The absolute ...

  • Page 1194

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions 1194 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.6.3 Time sequence Time sequence Referencing with distance-coded reference marks can be divided into two phases: ● Phase 1: Travel across the reference mar...

  • Page 1195

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1195 Phase 1: Sequence Sequence without contact witha reference cam Once the reference point approaching process is started, the machine axis accelerates to the ref...

  • Page 1196

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions 1196 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Abort criterion If the parameterized number of reference marks is not detected within the parameterized distance, the machine axis is stopped and reference poi...

  • Page 1197

    R1: Referencing 14.6 Referencing with distance-coded reference marks Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1197 No travel to target position The machine axis is now referenced. To identify this, the NC sets an interface signal for the measuring system that is currently a...

  • Page 1198

    R1: Referencing 14.7 Referencing by means of actual value adjustment Basic Functions 1198 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Special features of modulo rotary axes With module rotary axes, the reference point position is mapped on the parameterized modulo range: MD30330 $MA_MODULO_RA...

  • Page 1199

    R1: Referencing 14.7 Referencing by means of actual value adjustment Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1199 14.7.2 Actual value adjustment for measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks Function In order to improve positioning precision by determining the ...

  • Page 1200

    R1: Referencing 14.8 Referencing in follow-up mode Basic Functions 1200 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 3. Traverse the machine axis across the parameterized number of reference marks. This automatically references the direct measuring system: DB31, ... DBX60.4 = 1 (referenced / s...

  • Page 1201

    R1: Referencing 14.8 Referencing in follow-up mode Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1201 Zero mark selection when several zero mark signals occur If several encoder zero marks are detected in the traversing range of the machine axis due to machine-specific factors, ...

  • Page 1202

    R1: Referencing 14.8 Referencing in follow-up mode Basic Functions 1202 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Aborting the reference operation An active referencing operation can be aborted by: ● Deselecting follow-up mode ● NCK Reset Response when measuring systems are already refe...

  • Page 1203

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1203 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders 14.9.1 Information about the adjustment Machine axes with absolute encoder The advantage of machine axes with absolute encoder is th...

  • Page 1204

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions 1204 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Battery failure ● Setting actual value (PRESETON) WARNING Data backup During the back-up of machine data of a machine A, the encoder status of the machine axis (MD3...

  • Page 1205

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1205 14.9.2 Calibration by entering a reference point offset Function During adjustment by entering the reference point offset, the difference between the position displayed on ...

  • Page 1206

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions 1206 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.9.3 Adjustment by entering a reference point value Function During adjustment by entering the reference point value, the absolute position of the machine axis with refer...

  • Page 1207

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1207 7. Operate the travel key used for referencing in step 2. The machine axis does not move when the traversing key is actuated! The NC calculates the reference point offset f...

  • Page 1208

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions 1208 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.9.4 Automatic calibration with probe Function In automatic adjustment with a probe, a known position in the machine is approached with the machine axis from a part progr...

  • Page 1209

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1209 3. Activate NCK-Reset for the acceptance of the entered machine data values. 4. Start part program. 5. After completion of the part program, re-secure the partial program s...

  • Page 1210

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions 1210 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Drive: Equivalent zero mark The digital input on the NCU interface to which the BERO is connected must be set in parameter p0494 or p0495. Execution Reference point approac...

  • Page 1211

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1211 14.9.7 Reference point approach in rotary absolute encoders with external zero mark Function To be able to use the reference point approach with a zero mark, as is usual in...

  • Page 1212

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions 1212 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Property Incremental encoder Absolute encoder 0.0 Last position within MD34220. Position after POWER ON without actual value buffering MD34210 = 0 MD30270 = 1 Last standst...

  • Page 1213

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1213 Data backup and standard commissioning Some properties of an absolute encoder restrict the transfer of series startup files to other machines. The following machine data mu...

  • Page 1214

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions 1214 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD34232 $MA_EVERY_ENC_SERIAL_NUMBER = 0 If the NC now reads zero as the serial number, the encoder status is not reset and the serial number indicated in the machine data i...

  • Page 1215

    R1: Referencing 14.9 Referencing with absolute encoders Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1215 Parameterizing the encoder limit frequency (spindles) The EQN 1325 absolute encoder made by Heidenhain has an incremental track and an absolute track. If a spindle is driv...

  • Page 1216

    R1: Referencing 14.10 Automatic restoration of the machine reference Basic Functions 1216 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.9.10 Referencing variants not supported The following referencing variants are not supported when used with absolute encoders: ● Referencing/calibrating w...

  • Page 1217

    R1: Referencing 14.10 Automatic restoration of the machine reference Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1217 Note SMExx sensor modules Automatic referencing or restoration of the actual position to the last buffered position after restarting the control is only possi...

  • Page 1218

    R1: Referencing 14.10 Automatic restoration of the machine reference Basic Functions 1218 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 NC/PLC interface signals After automatic referencing, the encoder state "Referenced" is displayed for the active measuring system: DB31, ... DBX60.4/...

  • Page 1219

    R1: Referencing 14.10 Automatic restoration of the machine reference Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1219 Parameter assignment Release: Restoration of the actual position The enable to restore the actual position is performed by setting the encoder state to "T...

  • Page 1220

    R1: Referencing 14.11 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions 1220 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.11 Supplementary conditions 14.11.1 Large traverse range Linear axes with a traversing range > 4096 encoder revolutions, rotatory absolute encoder EQN 1325 and a parameterized...

  • Page 1221

    R1: Referencing 14.12 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1221 Notes on uniqueness of encoder positions Note Linear absolute encoders The absolute value of linear position encoders, e.g. Heidenhain LC181, is always unique for the scale lengths available. R...

  • Page 1222

    R1: Referencing 14.12 Data lists Basic Functions 1222 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.12.1.3 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 30200 NUM_ENCS Number of encoders 30240 ENC_TYP Actual value encoder type 30242 ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT Encoder is inde...

  • Page 1223

    R1: Referencing 14.12 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1223 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 34300 ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST Basic distance of reference marks for distance-coded encoders 34310 ENC_MARKER_INC Interval between two reference marks with distanc...

  • Page 1224

    R1: Referencing 14.12 Data lists Basic Functions 1224 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 14.12.2.5 Signals to axis/spindle Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Follow-up mode (request) DB31, ... .DBX1.4 DB380x.DBX1.4 Position measuring system 1 / position measuring system 2 ...

  • Page 1225

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1225 S1: Spindles 1515.1 Brief Description The primary function of a spindle is to set a tool or workpiece in rotary motion in order to facilitate machining. Depending on the type of machine, the spindle must support the following fun...

  • Page 1226

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1226 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.2 Modes 15.2.1 Overview Spindle modes The spindle can have the following modes: ● Control mode ● Oscillation mode ● Positioning mode ● Synchronous mode, synchronous spindle References: Functio...

  • Page 1227

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1227 15.2.2 Mode change Switching between spindle and axis operation can be done as follows: ● Control mode → Oscillation mode The spindle changes to oscillation mode if a new gear stage has been specifie...

  • Page 1228

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1228 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Positioning mode → Oscillation mode If the orientation of the spindle is to be terminated, M41 to M45 can be used to change to oscillation mode. When the gear change is complete, the last programmed...

  • Page 1229

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1229 Requirements A spindle position actual value encoder is absolutely essential for M3/M4/M5 in connection with: ● Revolutional feedrate (G95) ● Constant cutting speed (G96, G961, G97, G971) ● Thread c...

  • Page 1230

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1230 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Independent spindle reset The spindle response after a reset or the end of the program (M2, M30) is set with the machine data: MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET (individual spindle reset) Value Mean...

  • Page 1231

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1231 ● If the speed drops below the minimum speed or when NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX61.4 (axis/spindle stationary) is detected, NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX83.5 (nact = nset) is reset (e.g. for an emergency machi...

  • Page 1232

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1232 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.2.5 Positioning mode 15.2.5.1 General functionality When is positioning mode used? The spindle positioning mode stops the spindle at the defined position and activates the position control, which remai...

  • Page 1233

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1233 SPOS[<n>]=... Same functional sequence as SPOS [<n>]=DC(...). SPOS[<n>]=ACP(...) Approaches the position from the positive direction. When positioning from a negative direction of rotati...

  • Page 1234

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1234 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Implicitly generated auxiliary function M19 To achieve uniformity in terms of how M19 and SPOS or SPOSA behave at the NC/PLC interface, auxiliary function M19 can be output to the NC/PLC interface in the ...

  • Page 1235

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1235 End of positioning The positioning can be programmed with: FINEA[S<n>]: End of motion on reaching "Exact stop fine" (DB31, ... DBX60.7) COARSEA[S<n>]: End of motion on reaching &quo...

  • Page 1236

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1236 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD configuration Setting: MD35500 $MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START = 1 is used to perform path interpolation taking the tolerance: MD35150 $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL into account only if the spindle has rotate...

  • Page 1237

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1237 The control waits before executing subsequent blocks until: ● Position(s) programmed with SPOSA are reached. ● Spindle standstill is reached with M5: DB31, ..., DBX 61.4 (spindle stationary) taking in...

  • Page 1238

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1238 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Response to NC and mode-group stop: If an NC or mode-group stop is triggered during WAITS, the wait operation is resumed after the NC start with all the above conditions. Note In particular when usi...

  • Page 1239

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1239 Aborting the positioning process The positioning action is aborted: ● By the NC/PLC interface signal: DB31, ... DBX2.2 (delete distance-to-go / spindle reset). ● With every reset (e.g. operator panel ...

  • Page 1240

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1240 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Procedure Figure 15-1 Positioning from rotation Note The speed arising from the configuration of the encoder limit frequency for the resynchronization of the encoder (MD36302 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LOW) must be ...

  • Page 1241

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1241 Positioning from phase 1c: The spindle rotates at the programmed spindle speed whereby the speed is lower than the configured position-control activation speed: MD35300 $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO The spindle...

  • Page 1242

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1242 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Phase 4 Spindle speed > Position-control activation speed The spindle brakes from the calculated "braking point" with machine data: MD35210 $MA_GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL to the target position...

  • Page 1243

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1243 The exact stop limits are defined with the machine data: MD36010 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse) Note The positioning procedure is considered ...

  • Page 1244

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1244 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 15-2 Positioning with stationary spindle Phase 1 Case 1: Spindle not synchronized With the programming of SPOS, M19 or SPOSA the spindle accelerates with the acceleration from the machine data: MD...

  • Page 1245

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1245 The spindle is synchronized at the next zero mark of the spindle position actual-value encoder and switches to the position control mode. Whether the zero mark is found in the traversed path (except for I...

  • Page 1246

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1246 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Phase 3 At the point, which is determined by the braking start point calculation in Phase 2, the spindle decelerates to a standstill with the acceleration given in the following machine data: MD35210 $MA_...

  • Page 1247

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1247 15.2.5.4 "Spindle in position" signal for tool change Function The motion sequence for a tool change, especially for milling machines, mainly comprises positioning the spindle and then the subse...

  • Page 1248

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1248 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Deleting the signal When signal DB31, ... DBX60.7 is withdrawn (exact stop fine), then signal DB31, ... DBX85.5 (spindle in position) is also always reset. Additional properties ● If the spindle is alre...

  • Page 1249

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1249 Preconditions ● The same spindle motor is used for spindle mode and axis mode. ● The same position measurement system or separate position measurement systems can be used for spindle mode and axis mod...

  • Page 1250

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1250 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● The gear step cannot be changed when the axis mode is active. The spindle must be switched to control mode. This is done with M41 ... M45 and M5, SPCOF. ● In axis mode, the first parameter set is ...

  • Page 1251

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1251 Change to spindle mode The appropriate parameter set 1 ... 5 is selected for the active gear stage. Except for tapping with compensating chuck, the feedforward control is switched on when the following ap...

  • Page 1252

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1252 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Procedure Sequence of the implicit transition to axis mode (M70 is not programmed in the part program): ● Transition from speed control mode (M3, M4, M5, SPCOF, ...) to axis mode: The transition is dete...

  • Page 1253

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1253 Constraints Synchronized actions When the spindle is programmed as an axis in synchronized actions, it is essential to continue making provisions in the application to ensure there are criteria for the tr...

  • Page 1254

    S1: Spindles 15.2 Modes Basic Functions 1254 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example 3: Synchronized actions: Transition from spindle positioning mode to axis mode Configuration: MD35035 $MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 20 = 1 Program code Comment WHEN COND1==TRUE DO SPOS=180 WHEN ...

  • Page 1255

    S1: Spindles 15.3 Reference / synchronize Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1255 Time when the spindle basic setting takes effect The time when the spindle basic setting takes effect is set in the machine data: MD35030 $MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK Value Effective time...

  • Page 1256

    S1: Spindles 15.3 Reference / synchronize Basic Functions 1256 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Installation position of the position measurement system The position measurement systems can be installed as follows: ● Directly on the motor in combination with a Bero proximity swit...

  • Page 1257

    S1: Spindles 15.3 Reference / synchronize Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1257 ● Crossing the zero mark in JOG mode by means of direction keys in speed control mode. Note It does not make any difference whether the synchronization procedure is initiated from th...

  • Page 1258

    S1: Spindles 15.3 Reference / synchronize Basic Functions 1258 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The effect depends on the setting in machine data: MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE (referencing mode) MD34200 = 7 The setting MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 7 only executes position synchroniz...

  • Page 1259

    S1: Spindles 15.3 Reference / synchronize Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1259 Position measurement systems, spindle The spindle can be switched from spindle mode to axis mode (rotary axis) if a single motor is used for spindle mode and axis mode. The spindle (spin...

  • Page 1260

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1260 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Position restoration with POWER ON For spindles with incremental position measuring systems, it is possible to buffer the actual values after a POWER OFF and after POWER ON, to rest...

  • Page 1261

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1261 Parameterization of the gear stages The gear stages 1 to 5 can be parameterized via the following machine data: Machine data Meaning MD35012 $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION[<n>...

  • Page 1262

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1262 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Bit Value Meaning 3 1 The gear stage change dialog between NCK and PLC is simulated. 5 1 The second gear stage data set is used while tapping with G331/G332 (see the following parag...

  • Page 1263

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1263 ● In the reset state through description of NC/PLC interface: DB31, ... DBX16.0-16.2 (actual gear stage A to C) The mechanically active gear stage can be communicated to the NC es...

  • Page 1264

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1264 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Process sequence of the gear stage change If the new gear stage is preselected, the following sequence is implemented: 1. Changeover sequence The two following NC/PLC interface sign...

  • Page 1265

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1265 If this is not the case, then Alarm 22010 : MD11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK, Bit 3 = 0 is output. Following acknowledgement of gear stage change via the PLC with NC/PLC IS: DB31, ...

  • Page 1266

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1266 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The gear stages 1 to 5 of the second gear stage data set can be parameterized via the following machine data: Machine data Meaning MD35112 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2[n] Maximum spee...

  • Page 1267

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1267 Figure 15-4 Example for two gear stages with overlapping speed ranges for automatic gear stage change (M40) Note In the case of M40, the spindle must be in open-loop control mode...

  • Page 1268

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1268 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Permanently defining the gear stage with M41 to M45 The gear stage can be permanently defined in the part program with M41 to M45. If a gear stage is specified via M41 to M45 that i...

  • Page 1269

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1269 Specification of a gear stage in synchronized actions The gear stage change can be requested by synchronized actions using: ● DO M40 S... Automatic gear stage selection to the pro...

  • Page 1270

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1270 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 NC stop during gear stage change The spindle cannot be stopped with NC/PLC IS: DB21, ... DBX7.4 (NC stop) if: ● The spindle is not yet in oscillation mode for the gear stage cha...

  • Page 1271

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1271 ● The "Ramp-function generator rapid stop" signal must be reset by the PLC before the gear stage change is completed by the PLC. ● The process sequence of the gear sta...

  • Page 1272

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1272 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Gear stage change in synchronized actions, FC18 and DBB30 The actual gear stage signaled from the PLC is always evaluated by the NC when the gear stage is changed. The gear stage is...

  • Page 1273

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1273 5. N05 (part program, refer below) is executed: The gear stage is changed to gear stage 1. From the NC: – the following NC/PLC-interface signal is set: DB31, ... DBX82.3 (change o...

  • Page 1274

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1274 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.4.3 Determining the spindle gear stage The actual stage of a spindle can be read using system variables: ● For the display in the user interface, in synchronized actions or wit...

  • Page 1275

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1275 15.4.4 Parameter set selection during gear step change Servo parameter sets The servo parameter sets 1 to 6 adapt the position controller to the changed properties of the machine du...

  • Page 1276

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1276 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Spindle mode MD35590 $MA_PARAMSET_CHANGE_ENABLE = 0 or 1 The parameter set is selected according to the gear stage + 1. The active gear stage is located in: DB31, ... DBX16.0-16.2 (...

  • Page 1277

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1277 Load gearbox transmission ratio It is possible to configure positive or negative load gearbox factors for each gear stage and in axis mode. The setting is undertaken separately for ...

  • Page 1278

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1278 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Tool change If the intermediate gear is changed at the same time as the tool, the user must also reconfigure the transmission ratio of the numerator and denominator via the machine ...

  • Page 1279

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1279 15.4.6 Nonacknowledged gear step change Mode change A gear stage change that has not been acknowledged cannot be interrupted by a change in operating mode (e.g. switchover to JOG)....

  • Page 1280

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1280 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.4.7 Gear step change with oscillation mode What is oscillation? Oscillation in this context means that the spindle motor rotates alternately in the clockwise and counter-clockwis...

  • Page 1281

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1281 Oscillation time The oscillation time for oscillation mode can be defined in a machine date for each direction of rotation: Oscillation time in M3 direction (referred to as t1 in t...

  • Page 1282

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1282 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Oscillation via PLC NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX18.4 (oscillation via PLC) and DB31, ... DBX18.5 (oscillation speed) accelerates the spindle motor to the speed (with oscillation acceler...

  • Page 1283

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1283 ● The acceleration is defined in the following machine data: MD35410 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL ● The spindle will cease to be synchronized if an indirect measuring system (motor e...

  • Page 1284

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1284 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Writing of NC/PLC IS: DB31, ... DBX16.0-16.2 (actual gear stage A to C) by the PLC. ● Once the PLC has sent: DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear changed) to the NCK, the last movement to...

  • Page 1285

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1285 Oscillation mode Typical time sequence for the gear stage change with a spindle: t1: With the programming of S1300, NCK detects a new gear stage (second gear stage), sets NST DB31,...

  • Page 1286

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1286 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 t4: NCK then retracts NST DB31, ... DBX82.3 (change gear), ends the oscillation, releases the next part program block for processing, and accelerates the spindle to the new S value ...

  • Page 1287

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1287 ● After reaching the gear stage change position configured in machine data: MD35012$MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION the machine waits for the time in machine data: MD35310 $MA_SPIND_...

  • Page 1288

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1288 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 GSC at fixed position Typical time sequence for the gear stage change at fixed position: t1: With the programming of S1300, NCK detects a new gear stage (second gear stage), NCK se...

  • Page 1289

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1289 t4: The new gear stage is engaged. The PLC user transfers the new (actual) gear stage to the NCK and sets NST DB31, ... DBX16.3 (gear is changed). t5: NCK then retracts NST DB31, .....

  • Page 1290

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1290 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Speed The positioning speed is taken from the machine data which is configured depending on the gear stage: MD35300 $MA_SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO NC/PLC IS "Spindle speed override&q...

  • Page 1291

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1291 End of positioning The transition between the end of the positioning action (DB31, ... DBX84.5) and the start of oscillation mode (DB31, ... DBX84.6) is defined on reaching "Ex...

  • Page 1292

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1292 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.4.9 Configurable gear step in M70 Technical background In some machines the spindle needs to be in a particular gear stage during axis mode. Possible reasons: ● Only one optimi...

  • Page 1293

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1293 Boundary conditions Gear step change at fixed position (MD35010 $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE = 2) The "gear step change at fixed position" function is supported. The sequen...

  • Page 1294

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions 1294 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.4.10 Suppression of the gear stage change for DryRun, program test and SERUPRO Function For test feed rate (DryRun), program test and SERUPRO, normally, a gear stage change is no...

  • Page 1295

    S1: Spindles 15.4 Configurable gear adaptation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1295 Determining the last active gear stage System variable $P_GEAR returns the gear stage programmed in the part program (which may not have been output to the PLC). System variable $A...

  • Page 1296

    S1: Spindles 15.5 Additional adaptations to the spindle functionality that can be configured Basic Functions 1296 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ; PI service: Activate dry run feedrate (DryRun) ;(Configuring) N10 M42 ; 2nd gear stage requested, no gear stage change takes place N...

  • Page 1297

    S1: Spindles 15.6 Selectable spindles Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1297 Bit Meaning Bit 12 = 0 Spindle override is not effective for the zero mark search with M19, SPOS or SPOSA = 0. 12 Bit 12 = 1 Spindle override is effective for the zero mark search with M19, ...

  • Page 1298

    S1: Spindles 15.6 Selectable spindles Basic Functions 1298 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The channel spindles can be switched over because an intermediate level is introduced between the logical spindle numbers used in the part program and the physical spindles existing in the c...

  • Page 1299

    S1: Spindles 15.6 Selectable spindles Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1299 ● The multiple mapping of logical to physical spindles is not prevented in the NC. However, with the display of logical spindle in the user interface, there are ambiguities corresponding t...

  • Page 1300

    S1: Spindles 15.6 Selectable spindles Basic Functions 1300 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Specifying the master spindle: MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND = 1 Spindle number converter: MD20092 $MC_SPIND_ASSIGN_TAB_ENABLE=1 ; Activate spindle number converter SD42800 $SC_...

  • Page 1301

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1301 15.7 Programming 15.7.1 Programming from the part program Programming statements Statement Description SETMS: Master spindle is the spindle specified in the following machine data: MD20090 $MC_SP...

  • Page 1302

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions 1302 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Statement Description SPOS=...: SPOS[<n>]=...: Spindle positioning for the master spindle Spindle positioning for spindle number <n> The block change is only performed when the spindle...

  • Page 1303

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1303 Statement Description C30 G90 G1 F3600 Rotary axis C (spindle in axis mode) travels to the position 30 degrees at a speed of 3600 degrees/min = 10 rpm G25 S...: G25 S<n>: Programmable minim...

  • Page 1304

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions 1304 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Statement Description SPI(<n>): With SPI(<n>) a spindle number is converted into the data type AXIS according to machine data MD35000 $MA_SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX[ ] . SPI is used if ...

  • Page 1305

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1305 15.7.2 Programming via synchronized actions M functions M40 to M45 can also be programmed in synchronized actions. Please note: ● The programming of M40 ... M45 in the part program has no effect o...

  • Page 1306

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions 1306 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.7.4 Special spindle motion via the PLC interface Note The function is only available when using SINUMERIK Operate! Why use a special spindle interface? This function can be used to program t...

  • Page 1307

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1307 At the start time, the spindle concerned must meet the following requirements: ● It must be in the state "Channel axis" or "Neutral axis" and must not be moved by means of the ...

  • Page 1308

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions 1308 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Bit 8 = 1 The programmed cutting speed S... including setpoints via FC18 and synchronized actions are accepted in the following setting data: SD43202 $SA_SPIND_CONSTCUT_S (cutting speed for spindle ...

  • Page 1309

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1309 Gear stage change and effect on speed In the current version, no gear stage change is triggered if the setpoint speed is out of the speed range of the gear stage (exceptions, see " 1321,M40: 13...

  • Page 1310

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions 1310 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Setting via synchronized actions For definition via synchronized actions, analog to the part program, the feedrate type defines how the S value is interpreted. Reading from part program and synchron...

  • Page 1311

    S1: Spindles 15.7 Programming Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1311 15.7.5 External programming (PLC, HMI) SD43300 and SD42600 The revolutional feedrate behaviour can be selected externally via the axial setting data: SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (Rotation...

  • Page 1312

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions 1312 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.8 Spindle monitoring 15.8.1 Permissible speed ranges The permissible speed range of a spindle results from the parameterized or programmed speed limit values and the active spindle functio...

  • Page 1313

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1313 15.8.2 Axis/spindle stationary Functions such as tool change, open machine doors, path feedrate enable, etc. are only possible at the machine when the spindle is stationary. Function The &quo...

  • Page 1314

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions 1314 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Spindle setpoint speed The spindle setpoint speed is derived from the programmed speed taking into account the spindle correction and the active limits. If the programmed speed is limited o...

  • Page 1315

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1315 The minimum gear stage speed is effective only in speed mode and can only be undershot by: ● Spindle override 0% ● M5 ● S0 ● DB31, ... DBX4.3 (spindle stop) ● DB31, ... DBX2.1 (wit...

  • Page 1316

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions 1316 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following system variables are available in the spindle mode: System variable Meaning $AC_SMAXVELO[<n>] Maximum possible spindle speed [rpm] resulting from the active limiting data...

  • Page 1317

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1317 Example Example of the visualization of the content of the system variables for Spindle 1. The variables are written to the R parameters cyclically. These can be displayed on HMI in the R Par...

  • Page 1318

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions 1318 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Responses to violation If the actual speed of the spindle exceeds the parameterized maximum spindle speed by more than the tolerance value (MD35150 $MA_SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL), this results in th...

  • Page 1319

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1319 Maximum encoder frequency exceeded. If the spindle speed reaches a speed (large S value programmed), which exceeds the maximum encoder limit frequency (the maximum mechanical speed limit of t...

  • Page 1320

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions 1320 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.8.8 End point monitoring End point monitoring During positioning (the spindle is in positioning mode), the system monitors the distance from the spindle (with reference to the actual posit...

  • Page 1321

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1321 DB31, ... DBX60.7 and DB31, ... DBX60.6 (position reached with exact stop coarse / fine) The two limit values defined by machine data: MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (Exact stop limit coarse) ...

  • Page 1322

    S1: Spindles 15.8 Spindle monitoring Basic Functions 1322 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● Programmed speed = 0 When programming speed 0 (S0) the behavior depends on the configuration of the minimum speed of the first gear stage MD35120 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO[1]: – If MD35120...

  • Page 1323

    S1: Spindles 15.9 Spindle with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1323 Configuring data for spindle 1 (AX5): MD35010 $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE[AX5] = 1 ; Enable gear stage change MD35090 $MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS[AX5] = 2 ; Number of existing gear s...

  • Page 1324

    S1: Spindles 15.9 Spindle with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle) Basic Functions 1324 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.9.2 Sensor data Sensors in the spindle motor The spindle sensors provide information about the clamping device and the angular position of the motor shaft: ● Analog sens...

  • Page 1325

    S1: Spindles 15.9 Spindle with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1325 Meaning System variable $VA_ NC/PLC interface DB31, ... OPI variables Drive parameters Status digital sensors MOT_SENSOR_DIGI[<axis>] DBW138 vaMotSensorDigi r5003 <a...

  • Page 1326

    S1: Spindles 15.9 Spindle with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle) Basic Functions 1326 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 State value To simplify the evaluation, the clamped state in the system data is also available as state value 0 - 11. A voltage range corresponds to a certain clamped state. ...

  • Page 1327

    S1: Spindles 15.9 Spindle with SMI 24 (Weiss spindle) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1327 Voltage range 2) State value 1) Clamped state Upper limit Lower limit Speed limit 9 Clamping without tool - - p5043[5] 10 Clamped without tool p5041[4] p5041[5] p5043[6] 11 C...

  • Page 1328

    S1: Spindles 15.10 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions 1328 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.10 Supplementary conditions 15.10.1 Changing control parameters For spindles that are not in position-controlled mode, machine data changes also take effect when the spindle is not ...

  • Page 1329

    S1: Spindles 15.12 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1329 N30 S1500 ; 1500 3 40 N40 SPOS=0** ; 1500 -19 40 N50 M19** ; 1500 -19 40 N60 G94 G331 Z10 S300 ; 300 -19 40 N70 M42 ; 300 -19 42 N80 M4 ; 300 4 42 N90 M70 ; 300 70 42 N100 M3 M40 ; 300 3 40 N999 M30...

  • Page 1330

    S1: Spindles 15.12 Data lists Basic Functions 1330 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 15.12.1.3 Axis/spindlespecific machine data Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 30300 IS_ROT_AX Rotary axis 30310 ROT_IS_MODULO Modulo conversion 31044 ENC_IS_DIRECT2 Encoder on intermediate gear ...

  • Page 1331

    S1: Spindles 15.12 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1331 Number Identifier: $MA_ Description 35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO[n] Minimum speed for automatic gear stage change 35122 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2[n] 2nd gear step data set: Minimum speed for automatic gear st...

  • Page 1332

    S1: Spindles 15.12 Data lists Basic Functions 1332 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS Mirror wear values of machining plane 42930 WEAR_SIGN Invert sign of all wear values 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Retain the assignment of tool ...

  • Page 1333

    S1: Spindles 15.12 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1333 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Resynchronize spindle 1 DB31, ... .DBX16.4 DB380x.DBX2000.4 Resynchronize spindle 2 DB31, ... .DBX16.5 DB380x.DBX2000.5 no n-monitoring with gear change ...

  • Page 1334

    S1: Spindles 15.12 Data lists Basic Functions 1334 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Rigid tapping active DB31, ... .DBX84.3 DB390x.DBX2002.3 active spindle mode synchronous mode DB31, ... .DBX84.4 DB390x.DBX2002.4 Active spindle position...

  • Page 1335

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1335 V1: Feedrates 1616.1 Brief description Types of feedrate The feedrate determines the machining speed (axis or path velocity) and is observed in every type of interpolation, even where allowance is made for tool offsets on the c...

  • Page 1336

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1336 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Feedrate control The programmed feedrate can be changed during the machining or for test purposes to enable adjustment to the changed technological conditions. ● Via the machine control panel...

  • Page 1337

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1337 Feedrate for internal radius and external radius path sections For circular blocks or spline blocks with curvature in the same direction and tool radius offset activated (G41/G42), the programm...

  • Page 1338

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1338 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Low-resolution encoders When using low-resolution encoders, more continuous path or axis motions can be achieved with smoothed actual values. The larger the time constant, the better the smooth...

  • Page 1339

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1339 Linear feedrate (G94) The linear feedrate is programmed in the following units relative to a linear or rotary axis: ● [mm/min, degrees/min] on standard metric systems ● [inch/min, degree...

  • Page 1340

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1340 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example: Milling cutter with 5 teeth ($TC_DPNE = 5) Program code Comment N10 G0 X100 Y50 N20 G1 G95 FZ=0.02 ; Tooth feedrate 0.02 mm/tooth N30 T3 D1 ; Load tool and activate tool offset data...

  • Page 1341

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1341 16.2.2 Type of feedrate G96, G961, G962, G97, G971 Constant cutting rate (G96, G961) The constant cutting rate is used on turning machines to keep the cutting conditions constant, independentl...

  • Page 1342

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1342 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Diameter programming and reference axis for several transverse axes in one channel: One or more transverse axes are permitted and can be activated simultaneously or separately: ● Programming ...

  • Page 1343

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1343 Note G96, G961 is only active during workpiece machining (G1, G2, G3, spline interpolation, etc., where feedrate F is active). The response of the spindle speed for active G96, G961 and G0 bl...

  • Page 1344

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1344 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX83.1 (programmed speed too high) In order to ensure smooth rotation with large part diameters, the spindle speed is not permitted to fall below a minimum level. This speed can be ...

  • Page 1345

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1345 ● If a negative maximum spindle speed is programmed with the LIMS program command when G96, G961 are active, alarm 14820 "Negative maximum spindle speed programmed for G96, G961" is...

  • Page 1346

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1346 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 NC stop, single block NC stop and single block (even at the block boundary) are only active after completion of thread chaining. All successive G33 blocks and the first following non-G33 block ...

  • Page 1347

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1347 Short run-out path Due to the collar on the thread run-out, little room is left for the deceleration ramp, leading to the risk of collision between the workpiece and the tool edge. The decelera...

  • Page 1348

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1348 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Setting data SD42010 (acceleration behavior of axis when thread cutting) When a block containing DITS and/or DITE is inserted in the main run, the programmed run-in/run-out path is taken into ...

  • Page 1349

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1349 Both G34 and G35 functions imply the functionality of G33 and also provide the option of programming an absolute pitch change value for the thread under F. If the start and end pitch of a threa...

  • Page 1350

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1350 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Thread cutting G33 with decreasing thread pitch G35 Program code Comment N1608 M3 S10 ;Spindle speed N1609 G0 G64 Z40 X216 ;Approach starting point N1610 G33 Z0 K100 SF=R14 ;Thread wit...

  • Page 1351

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1351 16.2.3.4 Fast retraction during thread cutting Function The "Fast retraction for thread cutting (G33)" function can be used to interrupt thread cutting without causing irr...

  • Page 1352

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1352 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The retraction direction is controlled in conjunction with ALF with G functions LFTXT and LFWP. LFTXT: The plane in which the retraction motion is executed is calculated from the path tangent...

  • Page 1353

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1353 Note LFON or LFOF can always be programmed, but the evaluation is performed exclusively during thread cutting (G33). Note POLF with POLFMASK/POLFMLIN are not restricted to thread cutting ap...

  • Page 1354

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions 1354 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Program code Comment N68 G0 Z5 N69 X10 N70 G33 Z30 K5 LFON DILF=10 LFWP ALF=7 ; Enable fast retraction for thread cutting. ; Retraction path = 10 mm ; Retraction plane Z/X (because of G18...

  • Page 1355

    V1: Feedrates 16.2 Path feedrate F Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1355 Speed S, feedrate F, thread pitch A revolutional feedrate [mm/rev] is used for G331 and G332. The revolutional feedrate is defined by programming the thread pitch [mm/rev]. The speed of the axe...

  • Page 1356

    V1: Feedrates 16.3 Feedrate for positioning axes (FA) Basic Functions 1356 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 16.2.5 Feedrate for tapping with compensating chuck (G63) Function G63 is a subfunction for tapping threads using a tap with compensating chuck. An encoder (position encoder)...

  • Page 1357

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1357 Default setting If no axial feedrate FA is programmed, the axial default setting is applied: MD32060 $MA_POS_AX_VELO (initial setting for positioning axis velocity) Output to PLC The feedrate ...

  • Page 1358

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1358 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Channel-specific feedrate disable The NC/PLC interface signal: DB21, ... DBX6.0 (feedrate disable) stops all axes (geometry and auxiliary axes) of a channel in all modes. Effectiveness of...

  • Page 1359

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1359 "Spindle stop" The NC/PLC interface signal: DB31, ... DBX4.3 (spindle stop) stops the respective spindle. Effectiveness of the "Spindle stop" function • With active G3...

  • Page 1360

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1360 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following permanent assignment applies to binary code: Binary code decimal Override factor 00000000 0 0.00 ≙ 0% 00000001 1 0.01 ≙ 1% 00000010 2 0.02 ≙ 2% 00000011 3 0.03 ≙ 3% 0000...

  • Page 1361

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1361 Effectiveness of the channel-specific feedrate and rapid traverse override: • With active G33, G34, G35: Not effective • With active G63: Not effective • With active G331, G332: Not eff...

  • Page 1362

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1362 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Effectiveness of the axis-specific feedrate override: • With active G33, G34, G35: Not effective • With active G63: Not effective (the override is set in the NC permanently to 100%) • Wi...

  • Page 1363

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1363 Reference to spindle override The spindle override can refer to the speed or the programmed speed limited by the machine or setting data. The setting is realized via: MD12080 $MN_OVR_REFERENCE...

  • Page 1364

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1364 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Effectiveness The NC/PLC interface signals DB21, ... DBB6 (rapid traverse or feedrate override active) and DB31, ... DBX1.7 (axis-specific override active) do not refer to the programmable fee...

  • Page 1365

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1365 Effectiveness As long as the "Activate dry run feedrate" interface signal is set, instead of the programmed feedrate, the feedrate value set via SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED is effective in ...

  • Page 1366

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1366 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Mode of operation of the dry run feedrate The mode of operation of the dry run feedrate entered in SD42100 can be set via the setting data: SD42101 $SC_DRY_RUN_FEED_MODE Value Meaning 0 The...

  • Page 1367

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1367 Signals The input signals are combined in one input byte for the function. A fixed functional assignment applies within the byte. Table 16- 1 Input byte for the "Multiple feedrates in one...

  • Page 1368

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1368 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Hardware assignment The input byte for the "Multiple feedrate values in one block" function can be assigned a maximum of two digital input bytes or comparator input bytes of the NCK ...

  • Page 1369

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1369 Example: F7=1000 ;7 corresponds to input bit 7 The programmed values act non-modally. The path feedrate programmed under F applies in the next block. Dwell (sparking out time) and retractio...

  • Page 1370

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1370 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note Retraction path The unit for the retraction path refers to the current valid unit of measurement (mm or inch). The reverse stroke is always made in the opposite direction to the curren...

  • Page 1371

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1371 Example Internal grinding of a conical ring, where the actual diameter is determined using calipers and, depending on the limits, the feedrate value required for roughing, finishing or fine fi...

  • Page 1372

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1372 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 16.4.6 Fixed feedrate values Function The "Fixed feedrate values" function can be used to activate fixed feedrates (max. four) defined via the machine data instead of the programme...

  • Page 1373

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1373 ● In JOG mode for machine axes using the axis-specific interface signals: DB31, ... DBX3.2 (activate fixed feedrate 1) DB31, ... DBX3.3 (activate fixed feedrate 2) DB31, ... DBX3.4 (acti...

  • Page 1374

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1374 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● FLIN An F value programmed in the block is traversed linearly over the path from the current value at the beginning of the block to the end of the block, and is subsequently regarded as mo...

  • Page 1375

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1375 Programming Syntax: ... FRC/FRCM=<value> Meaning: FRC: Non-modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding FRCM: Modal feedrate for chamfer/rounding <value>: The feedrate is interpreted ac...

  • Page 1376

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1376 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Supplementary conditions FLIN/FCUB Feedrate interpolation FLIN and FCUB is not possible for chamfer/rounding. G0 FRC/FRCM is not active when a chamfer is traversed with G0. The programming is ...

  • Page 1377

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1377 Program code Comment N80 Y30 CHF=3 FRC=100 ; Chamfer N80-N90 with FRC=100 mm/min N90 X40 ; Modal rounding N90-N100 with FRCM=50 mm/min N100 Y40 FRCM=0 ; Modal rounding N100-N120 with F=100 mm/...

  • Page 1378

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1378 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 16.4.10 Influencing the single axis dynamic response Single axes Single axes can be programmed in the part program, in synchronized actions and via the PLC: POS[<axis>]=... POSA[<a...

  • Page 1379

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1379 ● Active servo parameter set The active parameter set can be changed: – Part program / synchronized action: SCPARA – PLC: DB31, … DBX9.0-2 (controller parameter set) For detailed infor...

  • Page 1380

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1380 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note The acceleration override programmed with ACC can be read using the system variable $AA_ACC. However, $AA_ACC is read in the part program at a different time than when reading in a sync...

  • Page 1381

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1381 end-of-motion criterion for single axes Similar to the block change criterion for path interpolation (G601, G602, G603) the end-of-motion criterion for traversing motion of individual axes c...

  • Page 1382

    V1: Feedrates 16.4 Feedrate control Basic Functions 1382 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Note The activation of the parameter set specified using SCPARA can be suppressed from the PLC user program: DB31,… DBX9.3 = 1 (parameter set specification disabled by SCPARA) In this c...

  • Page 1383

    V1: Feedrates 16.5 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1383 16.5 Supplementary conditions Unit of measurement The valid unit of measurement of the feedrates depends on the set measuring system and the entered axis type: MD10240 $MN_SCALING_SYST...

  • Page 1384

    V1: Feedrates 16.6 Data lists Basic Functions 1384 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 16.6 Data lists 16.6.1 Machine data 16.6.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 10704 DRYRUN_MASK Activation of dry run feedrate 10710 PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB Setting data ...

  • Page 1385

    V1: Feedrates 16.6 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1385 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 21220 MULTFEED_ASSIGN_FASTIN Assignment of input bytes of NCK I/O for "Multiple feedrate values in one block" 21230 MULTFEED_STORE_MASK Storage behavior...

  • Page 1386

    V1: Feedrates 16.6 Data lists Basic Functions 1386 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 16.6.2.2 Axis/spindle-specific setting data Number Identifier: $SA_ Description 43210 SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 Programmed spindle speed limiting G25 43220 SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 Programmed spindle speed limi...

  • Page 1387

    V1: Feedrates 16.6 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1387 16.6.3.3 Signals to axis/spindle Signal name SINUMERIK 840D sl SINUMERIK 828D Feed/spindle override DB31, ... .DBB0 DB380x.DBB0 Override active DB31, ... .DBX1.7 DB380x.DBX1.7 Activate fixed feedra...

  • Page 1388

    V1: Feedrates 16.6 Data lists Basic Functions 1388 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1

  • Page 1389

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1389 W1: Tool offset 1717.1 Brief description Calculating tool compensation data The SINUMERIK 840D sl controller can be used to calculate the following tool compensation data: ● Length compensation ● Radius compensation ● Stora...

  • Page 1390

    W1: Tool offset 17.1 Brief description Basic Functions 1390 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Toolholder with orientation capability This function permits the machining of inclined surfaces with allowance for tool length compensation, provided that the kinematics of the toolholder...

  • Page 1391

    W1: Tool offset 17.1 Brief description Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1391 G461/G462 In order to enable the solid machining of inside corners in certain situations with the activation and deactivation of tool radius compensation, commands G461 und G462 have bee...

  • Page 1392

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1392 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.2 Tool 17.2.1 General Select tool A tool is selected in the program with the T function. Whether the new tool will be loaded immediately by means of the T function depends on the setting in the mac...

  • Page 1393

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1393 Tool cutting edge Each tool can have up to 9 cutting edges. The 9 tool cutting edges are assigned to the D functions D1 to D9. Figure 17-1 Example of a tool T... with 9 cutting edges (D1 to D9) D fu...

  • Page 1394

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1394 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activating the tool offset D1 to D9 activate the tool compensation for a cutting edge on the active tool. Tool length compensation and tool radius compensation can be activated at different times: ● T...

  • Page 1395

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1395 Tool cutting edges Each tool can have up to 9 cutting edges (D1 to D9). The first cutting edge (D1) is set up automatically when a new tool is loaded in the tool compensation memory. Other cutting edges...

  • Page 1396

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1396 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming The above compensation block is to be calculated in the NC. Part program call: ... Dn 17.2.4 Address extension for NC addresses T and M MD20096 Whether also with tool management not activat...

  • Page 1397

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1397 Example The example below shows the effect of MD20096. Two spindles are considered. Spindle 1 is the master spindle. M6 was defined as the tool change signal. T1 = 5 M1 = 6 T2 = 50 M2 = 6 D4 ● If to...

  • Page 1398

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1398 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.2.5 Free assignment of D numbers "Relative" D numbers In the NCK, it is possible to manage the D numbers as "relative" D numbers for the tool compensation data sets. The correspo...

  • Page 1399

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1399 The cutting edge number CE is defined with system variable $TC_DPCE[t,d]: ● t stands for the internal T number. ● d stands for the D number. Write accesses are monitored for collisions, i.e. all c...

  • Page 1400

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1400 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Command Meaning GETACTTD Determines the associated T number for an absolute D number. There is not check for uniqueness. If several D numbers within a TO unit are the same, the T number of the first too...

  • Page 1401

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1401 MD18105 $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO = 9999 Tools can be assigned unique D numbers. For example: ● D numbers 1, 2, 3 are assigned to T number 1 ● D numbers 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 are assigned to T number ...

  • Page 1402

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1402 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● MD18105 $MN_MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO = 20 (max. value of the D numbers (DRAM)) Within the part program, this compensation is programmed as standard with T1, ....D2. You assign the current D number of...

  • Page 1403

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1403 The D numbers are redefined with: Program code Comment SETDNO( 1, 1, 100 ) ; T=1, cutting edge 1 receives the (new) D number 100 SETDNO( 2, 1, 10 ) ; T=2, cutting edge 1 receives the (old) D number 10 ...

  • Page 1404

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1404 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.2.6 Compensation block in case of error during tool change MD22550 If a tool preparation has been programmed in the part program and the NCK detects an error (e.g., the data set for the programmed T ...

  • Page 1405

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1405 Error in part program The options for intervention in the event of an error depend on how the tool change was programmed, defined via the machine data: MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE (new tool compensatio...

  • Page 1406

    W1: Tool offset 17.2 Tool Basic Functions 1406 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The following occurs when this part of the program is executed again: Txx ; Error! Data set with xx does not exist, ; Detect state; detect xx; ; continue in program .... Tyy M06 ; Detect bit memory &q...

  • Page 1407

    W1: Tool offset 17.3 Flat D number structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1407 Define the DRF offset in the transverse axis as a diameter offset with the machine data: MD20360 $MC_TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK bit 9 = 1 (definition of tool parameters) Deselecting an ...

  • Page 1408

    W1: Tool offset 17.3 Flat D number structure Basic Functions 1408 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.3.2 Creating a new D number (compensation block) Programming Tool compensations can be programmed with system variables $TC_DP1 to $TC_DP25. The contents have the same meaning as b...

  • Page 1409

    W1: Tool offset 17.3 Flat D number structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1409 17.3.3 D number programming MD18102 = 1 If MD18102 $MN_MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE = 1, then D compensation is activated without reference to a certain tool. D0 still contains the previou...

  • Page 1410

    W1: Tool offset 17.3 Flat D number structure Basic Functions 1410 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example 2: MD22550 = 0 Program code Comment T1 T2 T3 D777 ;No waiting, D777 is activated, T3= programmed and active tool in the display, D777= programmed and active compensatio...

  • Page 1411

    W1: Tool offset 17.3 Flat D number structure Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1411 Machine data Meaning MD20120 $MC_TOOL_RESET_VALUE Tool - Length compensation on power-up (RESET / TP end) MD20121 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE Preselect tool on RESET MD22550 $MC_TOOL_...

  • Page 1412

    W1: Tool offset 17.3 Flat D number structure Basic Functions 1412 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example Two spindles are defined, spindle 1 and spindle 2, and the following applies: MD20090 = 2 ; Spindle no. 2 is the master spindle. M6 ; Tool change desired, command refers impl...

  • Page 1413

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1413 Flat D number Flat D number means that tool management is carried out outside the NCK and there is no reference made to T numbers. No mixture of tool management and flat D number It does no...

  • Page 1414

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1414 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Tool parameter Significance Note Geometry - tool lengths 3 Length 1 4 Length 2 5 Length 3 Geometry - tool shape 6 Radius 1/Length 1 for 3D face milling 7 Length 2 for 3D face milling ...

  • Page 1415

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1415 3D-face milling Milling cutter types 111, 120, 121, 130, 155, 156 and 157 are given special treatment for 3D-face milling by evaluating tool parameters (1 -23). References For more informat...

  • Page 1416

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1416 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Tool types and tool parameters Different tool types and the most important tool parameters are listed in the following table. The tool parameters available for a certain tool type are desig...

  • Page 1417

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1417 Note The tool type has no significance in the turning tool groups. Nonlisted numbers are also permitted, in particular with grinding tools (400-499). Tool offset data Tool offset data (T...

  • Page 1418

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1418 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-3 Geometry of slotting saw (analogous to angle head cutter) The width of the saw blade is accounted for with tool radius compensation (G40 to G42 as follows: Command Significanc...

  • Page 1419

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1419 Figure 17-4 Dimensions for turning tools: Turning tool Cutting edge position parameter values Figure 17-5 Tool parameter 2 (P2): Machining behind the turning center Figure 17-6 Tool para...

  • Page 1420

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1420 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-7 Tool parameter 2 (P2): Cutting edge position for vertical boring and turning mills Special points to be noted ● If the cutting edge center point S is used instead of point P ...

  • Page 1421

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1421 Note All three tool parameters 3 to 5 (tool length 1 to 3) are always calculated in the three geometry axes, irrespective of the tool type. If more tool lengths are input in the tool par...

  • Page 1422

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1422 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.4.5 Tool parameters 6 - 11: Geometry - tool shape Meaning The shape of the tool is defined using the tool parameters 6 to 11. The data is required for the geometry tool radius compensa...

  • Page 1423

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1423 3D face milling Tool parameters 6 to 11 are required for tool description of 3D face milling. References Please refer to the following documentation for information about entering tool sh...

  • Page 1424

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1424 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Active tool size The geometry tool compensation (tool parameters 3 to 5) and the wear tool length compensation (tool parameters 12 to 14) are added together (geometry tool length 1 is added...

  • Page 1425

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1425 ● The tool and the tool adapter are measured separately but are installed on the machine in one unit (the tool size and adapter size are entered separately in a cutting edge). ● The too...

  • Page 1426

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions 1426 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.4.9 Tool parameter 24: Undercut angle Meaning Certain turning cycles, in which traversing motions with tool clearance are generated, monitor the tool clearance angle of the active tool f...

  • Page 1427

    W1: Tool offset 17.4 Tool cutting edge Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1427 Note If a tool clearance angle (tool parameter 24) of zero is entered, relief cutting is not monitored in the turning cycles. References Please refer to the following documentation for a...

  • Page 1428

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1428 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) 17.5.1 General Note For tool radius compensation (TRC) see: References: Programming Manual Fundamentals Only the Programming Guide c...

  • Page 1429

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1429 TRC on the plane TRC is active on the current plane (G17 to G19) for the following types of interpolation: • Linear interpolation ... G0, G1 • Circular interpolation ....

  • Page 1430

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1430 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Special points to be noted ● TRC can only be selected in a program block with G0 (rapid traverse) or G1 (linear interpolation). ● A tool must be loaded (T function) and ...

  • Page 1431

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1431 Special points to be noted ● KONT only differs from NORM when the tool start position is behind the contour. Figure 17-12 Example for selecting TRC with KONT or NORM in f...

  • Page 1432

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1432 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Supplementary conditions The approach and retraction blocks are polynomials in the following two variants. Therefore, they are only available for control variants, which sup...

  • Page 1433

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1433 The associated NC program segment is as follows: $TC_DP1[1,1]=121 ;Milling tool $TC_DP6 [1,1]=10 ;Radius 10 mm N10 G1 X0 Y0 Z60 G64 T1 D1 F10000 N20 G41 KONTC X70 Y0 Z0 ...

  • Page 1434

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1434 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-14 Approach and retraction with constant curvature during inside machining of a full circle: 3D representation. KONTT and KONTC compared The figure below shows th...

  • Page 1435

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1435 Figure 17-15 Differences between KONTT and KONTC Note The figure shows that a straight line bordering on the contour quadrant, e.g. to X20 Y-20, would be violated with KO...

  • Page 1436

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1436 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Sub-movements There are maximum 4 sub-movements in case of soft retraction and approach with the following positions: ● Start point of the movement P0 ● Intermediate poi...

  • Page 1437

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1437 Modal G code for defining the approach and retraction contour This G code is only relevant if the approach contour is a quadrant or semicircle. The approach and retraction d...

  • Page 1438

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1438 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Modal G code (G340, G341), which defines the subdivision of the movement into individual blocks from the start point to the end point Figure 17-17 Sequence of the approach ...

  • Page 1439

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1439 An alarm is displayed: ● If DISR is negative and the amount is greater than the tool radius (the length of the resulting approach line is less than or equal to zero). Retr...

  • Page 1440

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1440 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming the end point P4 (or P0 for retraction) generally with X... Y... Z... Possible ways of programming the end point P4for approach End point P4 can be programmed in...

  • Page 1441

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1441 Possible ways of programming the end point P0for retraction The end position is always taken from the SAR block, no matter how many axes have been programmed. We distinguish...

  • Page 1442

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1442 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Velocity of the preceding block (typically G0). All movements from point P0 to point P2 are performed at this velocity, i.e., the movement parallel to the machining plane an...

  • Page 1443

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1443 $TC_DP1[1,1]=120 ;Milling tool T1/D1 $TC_DP6[1,1]=7 ;Tool with 7mm radius N10 G90 G0 X0 Y0 Z20 D1 T1 N20 G41 G341 G247 DISCL=AC(5) DISR=13FAD 500 X40 Y-10 Z=0 F2000 N30 X...

  • Page 1444

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1444 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-19 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on approach with G341 Velocities at retraction During retraction, the rolls of the modally active feedrate from the previous bl...

  • Page 1445

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1445 Figure 17-20 Velocities in the SAR subblocks on retraction 17.5.4.4 System variables Points P3 and P4 can be read in the WCS as system variables during approach. $P_APR: R...

  • Page 1446

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1446 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.5.4.5 Supplementary conditions Supplementary conditions ● Any further NC commands (e.g. auxiliary function outputs, synchronous axis movements, positioning axis movemen...

  • Page 1447

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1447 17.5.4.6 Examples Example 1 The following conditions must be true: ● Smooth approach is activated in block N20 ● X=40 (end point); Y=0; Z=0 ● Approach movement perform...

  • Page 1448

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1448 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example 2 The following conditions must be true for approach: ● Smooth approach is activated in block N20 ● Approach movement performed with quadrant (G247) ● Approach...

  • Page 1449

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1449 ● When DISR=5, the radius of SAR contour=20; that of the tool center point path=5 ● After the circle block, the retraction movement leads from Z8 to Z20 and the movement...

  • Page 1450

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1450 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.5.5 Deselecting the TRC (G40) G40 instruction TRC is deselected with the G40 instruction. Special points to be noted ● TRC can only be deselected in a program block wit...

  • Page 1451

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1451 Figure 17-23 Example of a 90 degree outside corner with G450 and G451 G450 (transition circle) With the G function G450 active, on outside corners, the center point of th...

  • Page 1452

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1452 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The programmable maximum value for DISC can be set via the machine data: MD20220 $MC_CUTCOM_MAX_DISC (max. value for DISC). Values greater than 50 are generally not advisa...

  • Page 1453

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1453 G451 (intersection) If G function G451 is active, the position (intersection) resulting from the path lines (straight line, circle or helix only) located at a distance of...

  • Page 1454

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1454 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Very flat outside corners Where outside corners are very flat, the response with G450 (transition circle) and G451 (intersection) becomes increasingly similar. In this case...

  • Page 1455

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1455 17.5.7 Compensation and inner corners Intersection If two consecutive blocks form an inside corner, an attempt is made to find a point at which the two equidistant paths in...

  • Page 1456

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1456 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-29 If there is no intersection between N30 and block N40, the intersection between block N30 and block N50 is calculated. Multiple intersections It can be the cas...

  • Page 1457

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1457 Special features Where multiple intersections with the next block are found, the intersection nearest the start of the next block applies. 17.5.8 Collision detection and bot...

  • Page 1458

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1458 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Warning 10763: "The path component of the block in the compensation plane will become zero." If a block has been omitted because of collision detection or bottlene...

  • Page 1459

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1459 17.5.9 Blocks with variable compensation value Supplementary conditions A variable compensation value is permissible for all types of interpolation (including circular and s...

  • Page 1460

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1460 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-33 Intersection calculation with variable compensation value Restrictions If during machining on the inside of the circle the compensation radius becomes geater t...

  • Page 1461

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1461 17.5.10 Keep tool radius compensation constant Description The "Keep tool radius compensation constant" function is used to suppress tool radius compensation for a...

  • Page 1462

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1462 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example: N10 ; Definition of tool d1 N20 $TC_DP1[1,1] = 110 ; Type N30 $TC_DP6[1,1]= ; Radius N40 N50 X0 Y0 Z0 G1 G17 T1 D1 F10000 N60 N70 X20 G42 NORM N80 X30 N9...

  • Page 1463

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1463 Special cases ● If tool radius compensation is not active (G40), CUTCONON has no effect. No alarm is produced. The G code remains active, however. This is significant if t...

  • Page 1464

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1464 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 ● The type of contour suppression is evaluated only in the first traversing block of a sequence of consecutive traversing blocks. If both CUTCONON and G41 or G42 are progr...

  • Page 1465

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1465 17.5.12 Intersection procedure for polynomials Function If two curves with active tool radius compensation form an outside corner, depending on the G code of the 18th group ...

  • Page 1466

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1466 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Example G42 D1 T1 ;Tool radius 20 mm ... G1 X110 Y0 N10 X0 N20 Y10 N30 G40 X50 Y50 Figure 17-35 Retraction behavior with G460 The last block with active tool ra...

  • Page 1467

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1467 G461 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block, the offset curve of this block is extended with a circle whose center point lies at the...

  • Page 1468

    W1: Tool offset 17.5 Tool radius compensation 2D (TRC) Basic Functions 1468 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 G462 If no intersection is possible between the last TRC block and a preceding block, a straight line is inserted, on retraction with G462 (initial setting), at the end poin...

  • Page 1469

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1469 In the second case (if no intersection is found between the inserted contour element and the preceding blocks), the intersection between the retraction straight line an...

  • Page 1470

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1470 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Availability For SINUMERIK 828D, the "toolholder with orientation capability" function is only available for the milling versions. Required data The following...

  • Page 1471

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1471 Toolholder with orientation capability Example: Cardan toolholder with two axes for the tool orientation Figure 17-38 Cardan toolholder with two axes Processing toolho...

  • Page 1472

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1472 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 TCOABS for active frame The absolute toolholder orientation is set using: TCOABS (Tool Carrier Orientation ABSolute) The orientation taken into account for the tool len...

  • Page 1473

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1473 Non-rotary toolholders The tool orientation used internally is dependent only on the basic orientation of the tool and the active plane (G17 - G19). Ambiguities With tw...

  • Page 1474

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1474 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Rotary axis parameters: $TC_CARR24 to $TC_CARR33 The system variables in $TC_CARR24 to $TC_CARR33 can be used to define offsets, angle compensations, Hirth tooth syst...

  • Page 1475

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1475 Description NCK variable Language format Default setting x component of rotary axis v2 $TC_CARR10 REAL 0 y component of rotary axis v2 $TC_CARR11 REAL 0 z component of ...

  • Page 1476

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1476 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Description NCK variable Language format Default setting Toolholder name $TC_CARR34 String[32] "" Axis name 1 $TC_CARR35 *) String[32] "" Axis name ...

  • Page 1477

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1477 The machine design is described by the following parameters: ● Two rotary axes (v1 and v2), each with one angle of rotation (α1 or α2), which counts positively for ...

  • Page 1478

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1478 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machine with rotary tool On machines with rotary tool there is no change in the definition of the kinematics compared to older software versions. The newly introduced ...

  • Page 1479

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1479 Machine with rotary workpiece On machines with rotary workpiece, the vector l1 has no significance. If it contains a value other than zero, this is ignored. The kinema...

  • Page 1480

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1480 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machines with extended kinematics On machines with extended kinematics (both tool and workpiece are rotary), it is only possible to turn each of the components with one...

  • Page 1481

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1481 Fine offset The offset vectors l1 to l4 and the offsets of the rotary axes v1 and v2 can be represented as the sum of a basic value and a fine offset. The fine offset p...

  • Page 1482

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1482 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The tool orientation in the initial state (both angles α1 and α2 are zero) is (as in the default case): ● G17: Parallel to Z. ● G18: Parallel to Y. ● G19: Paral...

  • Page 1483

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1483 Suitable assumptions were made for the following values in the data block: ● The two rotary axes intersect at one point. All components of l2 are therefore zero. ● ...

  • Page 1484

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1484 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Explanations The toolholder kinematic chosen in the example is such that the two rotary axes form an angle of 45 degrees, which means that the orientation cannot take j...

  • Page 1485

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1485 Furthermore, the following 3 functions are described, which are required for oblique machining: ● Position programming in the direction of the tool orientation indepe...

  • Page 1486

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1486 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 This makes it possible for machines, on which the axes used to set the toolholder with orientation capability are known within the NC, to access their position directly...

  • Page 1487

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1487 Figure 17-43 Zero offset on activation of a rotary table with TCARR Example On the machine in the figure, the rotary axis of the table is pointing in the positive Y di...

  • Page 1488

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1488 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The basic frame identified by following machine data is then no longer required for the zero offset: MD20184 $MC_TOCARR_BASE_FRAME_NUMBER (number of the basic frames fo...

  • Page 1489

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1489 17.6.5 Procedure when using toolholders with orientation capability Creating a toolholder The number of available toolholder data sets in the NCK is defined with mach...

  • Page 1490

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1490 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Selecting the toolholder A toolholder with number m is selected with the TCARR = m NC program command (TCARRTool Carrier). TCARR = 0 deselects an active toolholder. New...

  • Page 1491

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1491 Toolholder from G code of group 53 The G codes of group 53 (TOFRAME, TOROT, etc.) can be used to define a frame such that an axis direction (Z, Y or X) in this frame is...

  • Page 1492

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1492 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Two rotary axes Two general solutions exist for two rotary axes. The control itself chooses these two solution pairs such that the orientation angles resulting from the...

  • Page 1493

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1493 17.6.6 Programming Selecting the toolholder A toolholder is selected with the number m of the toolholder with: TCARR = m Access to toolholder data blocks The following...

  • Page 1494

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1494 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 With TCOFR, the two angles are determined from the current frame. The values stored in the toolholder data are not changed, however. These are also used to resolve the ...

  • Page 1495

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1495 Automatic toolholder selection, RESET For RESET or at program start, a toolholder can be selected automatically via the machine data: MD20126 $MC_TOOL_CARRIER_RESET_VAL...

  • Page 1496

    W1: Tool offset 17.6 Toolholder with orientation capability Basic Functions 1496 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Toolholder kinematics The following supplementary conditions must be met for toolholder kinematics: ● Tool orientation in initial state, both angles α1 and α2 zero,...

  • Page 1497

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1497 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated 17.7.1 Function Using the function "cutting data modification for rotatable...

  • Page 1498

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions 1498 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.7.3 Cutting edge position, cut direction and angle for rotary tools Turning tools Turning tools means the following tools whose tool type ($TC_...

  • Page 1499

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1499 Two different cut directions can be assigned to each cutting edge position: Cutting edge position: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cut direction: 2, 4 2, 3 1, 3...

  • Page 1500

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions 1500 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.7.4 Modifications during the rotation of turning tools Tool orientation Unlike milling tools, turning tools are not rotation-symmetric. This me...

  • Page 1501

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1501 Depending on the rotation, the cut direction is modified in such a way that the resulting clearance angle remains less than 90°. If the original ...

  • Page 1502

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions 1502 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The ratios are shown with examples in the figure below: Figure 17-46 Cutting edge reference point and cutting edge position (SL) for tool rotatio...

  • Page 1503

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1503 Any specified cutting edge position for tools that are not milling and tapping tools or turning tools according to the mentioned definitions, is n...

  • Page 1504

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions 1504 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.7.7 Parameter assignment Reaction to errors Different fault conditions can occur during the activation of the "Cutting edge data modificat...

  • Page 1505

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1505 Response to POWER ON The "cutting edge data modification for rotary tools" function (CUTMOD) is initialized automatically during POWER O...

  • Page 1506

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions 1506 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 -2 The function is always activated if a toolholder that can be orientated is active whose number is the same as the currently active toolholder t...

  • Page 1507

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1507 System variables The following system variables are available: System variables Meaning $P_CUTMOD_ANG / $AC_CUTMOD_ANG Supplies the (non-rounde...

  • Page 1508

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions 1508 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Modified cutting data If a tool rotation is active, the modified data is made available in the following system variables: System variable Meanin...

  • Page 1509

    W1: Tool offset 17.7 Cutting edge data modification for tools that can be rotated Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1509 Program code Comment N160 TCOABS CUTMOD=0 N170 G18 T1 D1 TCARR=2 X Y Z N180 X0 Y0 Z0 F10000 ;12.000 0.000 1.000 N190 $TC_CARR13[2]=30 N200...

  • Page 1510

    W1: Tool offset 17.8 Incrementally programmed compensation values Basic Functions 1510 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.8 Incrementally programmed compensation values 17.8.1 G91 extension Requirements Incremental programming with G91 is defined such that the compensation value...

  • Page 1511

    W1: Tool offset 17.8 Incrementally programmed compensation values Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1511 Supplementary condition If the behavior is set such that the offset remains active even after the end of the program and RESET MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, bit6=1...

  • Page 1512

    W1: Tool offset 17.8 Incrementally programmed compensation values Basic Functions 1512 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-48 Definition of the position for absolute programming of a motion in tool direction The reference to this auxiliary plane serves only to calculate the...

  • Page 1513

    W1: Tool offset 17.9 Basic tool orientation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1513 17.9 Basic tool orientation Application Normally, the orientation assigned to the tool itself depends exclusively on the active machining plane. For example, the tool orientation is pa...

  • Page 1514

    W1: Tool offset 17.9 Basic tool orientation Basic Functions 1514 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Define direction vector If all four system variables contain 0, the orientation is defined only by the active plane (as before). If system variable $TC_DPV[t, d] is equal to zero, the ...

  • Page 1515

    W1: Tool offset 17.9 Basic tool orientation Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1515 Plane change A change of plane causes a change in orientation. The following rotations are initiated: When changing from: Rotations G17 ⇒ G18: G18 ⇒ G19: G19 ⇒ G17: Rotation thr...

  • Page 1516

    W1: Tool offset 17.9 Basic tool orientation Basic Functions 1516 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Basic orientation $TC_DPV[t, d] Milling tools * Turning tools * 3 (V, 0, 0) (V, 0, 0) 4 (0, 0, -V) (0, -V, 0) 5 (0, -V, 0) (0, 0, -V) 6 (-V, 0, 0) (-V, 0, 0) * Turning tools in this c...

  • Page 1517

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1517 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations 17.10.1 Relevant setting data SD42900- 42960 Setting data SD42900 - SD42940 can be used to make the following settings wit...

  • Page 1518

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions 1518 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.10.2 Mirror tool lengths (SD42900 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH) Activation Tool length mirroring is activated via the setting data: SD42900 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH <>...

  • Page 1519

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1519 17.10.3 Mirror wear lengths (SD42920 $SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS) Activation Wear length mirroring is activated by: SD42920 $SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS <> 0 (TRUE) (Sign of we...

  • Page 1520

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions 1520 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Activation of modified setting data When the setting data described above are modified, the tool components are not reevaluated until the next time a tool edge is sele...

  • Page 1521

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1521 Layer Length 1 Length 2 Length 3 17 Y X Z *) X Z Y 19 Z Y X -17 X Y Z -18 Z X Y -19 Y Z X *) Each value not equal to 0 and not equal to one of the six listed values ...

  • Page 1522

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions 1522 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 The value range is from 0 to 2. Any other value is interpreted as 0. The assignment of tool length components is always independent of the actual tool type. ● With v...

  • Page 1523

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1523 17.10.7 Tool length offsets in tool direction Temperature compensation in real time On 5-axis machines with a moving tool, temperature fluctuations can occur in the ma...

  • Page 1524

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions 1524 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 In generic 5-axis transformation with: ● Transformation type 40 The tool orientation is constant with a rotary workpiece, which means that the motion of the rotary a...

  • Page 1525

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1525 Toolholder with orientation capability If a toolholder with orientation capability is active, the temperature compensation vector is rotated simultaneously to any chan...

  • Page 1526

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions 1526 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Machine data Value Remark MD20390 $MC_TOOL_TEMP_COMP_ON = TRUE Temperature compensation active MD32750 $MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE[ AX1 ] = 4 Compensation in tool directio...

  • Page 1527

    W1: Tool offset 17.10 Special handling of tool compensations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1527 Temperature compensation values in the NC program The compensation values assigned to axes X and Z are not zero and are applied for temperature compensation with respe...

  • Page 1528

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1528 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets 17.11.1 General Sum offsets Sum offsets can be treated as programmable process compensations during machining and are composed of all the er...

  • Page 1529

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1529 17.11.2 Description of function Sum offsets Several sum offsets (DL numbers) can be defined per D number. This allows you to determine, for example, workpiecelocationdependent ...

  • Page 1530

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1530 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Parameters for geometry and wear Tool geometry compensations are assigned to system variables $TC_DP3 to $TC_DP11. System variables $TC_DP12 to $TC_DP20 allow you to name a wea...

  • Page 1531

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1531 Parameters of the sum and setup offsets ($TC_SCPxy, $TC_ECPxy) The numbering of the parameters is oriented to the numbering of system variables $TC_DP3 to $TC_DP11. The effect ...

  • Page 1532

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1532 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Supplementary conditions The maximum number of DL data sets of a cutting edge and the total number of sum offsets in the NCK are defined by machine data. The default value is z...

  • Page 1533

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1533 The sum offset is deselected with the command: DL = 0 Note DL0 is not allowed. If compensation is deselected (D0 and T0), the sum offset also becomes ineffective. Programming...

  • Page 1534

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1534 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Tool T = t is active. With the data in the figure, the following is programmed: D2 ; Cutting edge offsets, i.e., $TC_DP3 to $TC_DP11 + wear ($TC_DP12 to $TC_DP20) + adapter di...

  • Page 1535

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1535 Reading/writing in the part program The individual sets of sum offset parameters are differentiated according to the number ranges of system variable $TC_SCP. The significance ...

  • Page 1536

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1536 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 When working with setup offsets, "sum offsets fine" are written with the $TC_SCPx system variables. Note When working with setup offsets, the data set for the setup...

  • Page 1537

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1537 Sum offsets and setup offsets on active tools cannot be deleted (similar to the deletion of D compensations or tool data). The "status" return value indicates the res...

  • Page 1538

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1538 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 D2 ; Compensation D2 is activated - the sum offset is not included in the compensation. X1 DL=1 ; Compensation D2 + sum offset 1 are activated. X2 D0 ; Compensation deselec...

  • Page 1539

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1539 • Adapter dimension (see note) ($TC_ADPT1 - $TC_ADPT3) • Total offsets fine ($TC_SCPx3 - $TC_SCPx5) • Sum offsets coarse or setup offsets ($TC_ECPx3 - $TC_ECPx5) • Offs...

  • Page 1540

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1540 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Influencing quantity Dependencies SD42900 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH SD42910 $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR SD42920 $SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS SD42930 $SC_WEAR_SIGN SD42940 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CON...

  • Page 1541

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1541 SD42935 Which of the wear components: ● Wear ($TC_DP12 - $TC_DP14) ● Setup offsets or sum offsets coarse ($TC_ECPx3 - $TC_ECPx5) ● Sum offsets fine ($TC_SCPx3 - $TC_SCPx...

  • Page 1542

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1542 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programming G-code group 56 can be used to define the following values: Syntax Corrections TOWSTD Initial setting value for offsets in tool length TOWMCS Wear values in the ma...

  • Page 1543

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1543 Figure 17-53 Coordinate system for the evaluation of tool lengths 17.11.5.2 Functionality of the individual wear values TOWSTD Initial setting (default behavior): ● The wea...

  • Page 1544

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions 1544 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Linear transformation The tool length can be uniquely defined in the MCS only if the MCS is generated by linear transformation from the BCS. This would be the case when: ● No...

  • Page 1545

    W1: Tool offset 17.11 Sum offsets and setup offsets Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1545 TOWTCS Wear values in TCS (tool coordinate system): ● If a toolholder with orientation capability is active, the tool vector is calculated as for TOWMCS, without taking the ...

  • Page 1546

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1546 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Special features If TOWMCS or TOWWCS is active, the following setting data does not affect the non-transformed wear components: SD42920 $SC_WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS (Sign of wear for ...

  • Page 1547

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1547 17.12.2 Saving with TOOLENV Scope of a tool environment The TOOLENV memory function is used to save any current states needed for the evaluation of tool data stored in the mem...

  • Page 1548

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1548 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Not in the tool environment The value of the machine data determines whether the adapter length or the tool base dimension is included in the tool length calculation: MD18104 ...

  • Page 1549

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1549 _NAME STRING Name, under which the current data set is stored. If a data set of the same name already exists, it is overwritten. In this case, the status is 0. 17.12.3 Del...

  • Page 1550

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1550 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.12.4 How many environments and which ones are saved? $P_TOOLENVN This system variable returns the number of available data sets for describing tool environments. (Data sets...

  • Page 1551

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1551 17.12.5 Read T, D, DL from a tool environment GETTENV function The GETTENV function is used to read the T, D and DL numbers stored in a tool environment. The GETTENV function ...

  • Page 1552

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1552 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.12.6 Read tool lengths, tool length components GETTCOR function The GETTCOR function is used to read out tool lengths or tool length components. The parameters can be used ...

  • Page 1553

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1553 Applicate (LEN[4]) Tool radius (LEN[5]) The coordinate system defined in _COMP and _STAT is used as the reference coordinate system for the length components. If no coordin...

  • Page 1554

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1554 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 If the first substring is empty (except for white spaces), the complete tool length is calculated allowing for all components. This applies even if the _COMP parameter is not...

  • Page 1555

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1555 _DL INT Number of the local compensation. If this parameter is not specified, the DL number used is based on the source of the T number. If the T number from the tool enviro...

  • Page 1556

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1556 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Kinematic transformation, toolholder with orientation capability If a toolholder with orientation capability is taken account of during the tool length calculation, the follow...

  • Page 1557

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1557 GETTCOR examples GETTCOR(_LEN): Calculates the tool length of the currently active tool in the machine coordinate system allowing for all components. GETTCOR(_LEN; "CGW ...

  • Page 1558

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1558 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Syntax: Status = SETTCOR(_CORVAL, _COMP, _CORCOMP, _CORMODE, _GEOAX, _STAT, _T, _D, _DL) With the exception of the first two parameters (_CORVAL and _COMP) all of the par...

  • Page 1559

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1559 If only one tool component is to be corrected (i.e. no vectorial correction, see parameter _CORMODE), the correction value is always in _CORVAL[0], independent of the axis on...

  • Page 1560

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1560 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 2: Vectorial offset, i.e. L1, L2 and L3 can change simultaneously. In contrast to the versions from 0 and 1, the offset values contained in _CORVAL refer to the coordinates o...

  • Page 1561

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1561 3:Val1new = Val1old + Val2old + _CORVAL Val2new = 0 The notation Val1old + Val2old is symbolic. If the two components (due to the status of _STAT) are evaluated in different...

  • Page 1562

    W1: Tool offset 17.12 Working with tool environments Basic Functions 1562 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 _DL INT Number of the offset dependent on the location. If this parameter is not specified, the DL number used is based on the source of the T number. If the T number from ...

  • Page 1563

    W1: Tool offset 17.13 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1563 Example 2 N10 def real _CORVAL[3] N20 $TC_DP1[1,1] = 120 ;Milling tool N30 $TC_DP3[1.1] = 10.0 ;Geometry L1 N40 $TC_DP12[1,1]= 1.0 ;Wear L1 N50 _CORVAL[0] = 0....

  • Page 1564

    W1: Tool offset 17.13 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Basic Functions 1564 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 _AXIND[3] INT array Indices 0 to 2 are assigned to the abscissa (0), ordinate (1) and applicate (2) (e.g. _AXIND[0] contains the number of the tool length compo...

  • Page 1565

    W1: Tool offset 17.13 Tool lengths L1, L2, L3 assignment: LENTOAX Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1565 Note In the TCS, all tool length components are always parallel or antiparallel to the axes. The components can only be antiparallel when mirroring is active an...

  • Page 1566

    W1: Tool offset 17.14 Supplementary conditions Basic Functions 1566 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 In this case, the associated matrix _MATRIX is: Note For further information to the above mentioned coordinate systems, please refer to: References: Programming Manual, Job Plann...

  • Page 1567

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1567 REORG The (only) writable variable $A_MONIFACT, which is defined here, is stored by main-run data. Since the write process takes place synchronously to the main run, no special measures are require...

  • Page 1568

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions 1568 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N100 N110 X0 Y0 Z0 F10000 N120 G42 CUT2DF TCOFR TCARR = 1 T1 D1 X10 N130 X40 N140 Y40 N150 X0 N160 Y0 N170 M30 17.15.1.2 Example of toolholder with orientation capability with rotary table ...

  • Page 1569

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1569 N90 $TC_CARR7[1] = 1 ; X component of 1st axis N100 $TC_CARR8[1] = 0 ; Y component of 1st axis N110 $TC_CARR9[1] = 0 ; Z component of 1st axis N120 $TC_CARR10[1] = 0 ; X component of 2nd axis N13...

  • Page 1570

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions 1570 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 As $TC_CARR21 and $TC_CARR22 refer to the machine axes A and B and TCOABS is active, the values in $TC_CARR13 and $TC_CARR14 are ignored, i.e. the axis position A0 B45 is used for the rotation. The...

  • Page 1571

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1571 17.15.1.3 Basic tool orientation example Basic orientation in the bisector A milling tool is defined with length L1=10 whose basic orientation is in the bisector of the XZ plane. N10 $TC_DP1[1,1]=...

  • Page 1572

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions 1572 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N80 $TC_ECP13[1,1]=0.01 ; Insert offset DL=1 N90 $TC_ADPTT[1]=5 ; Adapter transformation N100 $TC_ADPT1[1]=0.001 ; Adapter dimension ; Magazine data N110 $TC_MAP1[1]=3 ; Magazine type: Revolver N...

  • Page 1573

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1573 Explanations regarding the example above Starting at block N390, various methods are used to approach position X0 Y0 Z0. The machine positions reached are specified in the blocks in comments. After...

  • Page 1574

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions 1574 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.15.2 Examples 3-6: SETTCOR function for tool environments Example 3 N10 def real _CORVAL[3] N20 $TC_DP1[1,1] = 120 ; Milling tool N30 $TC_DP3[1,1] = 10.0 ; Geometry L1 N40 $TC_DP12[1,1] = 1.0 ...

  • Page 1575

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1575 N60 t1 d1 g17 g0 N70 r1 = settcor(_CORVAL, "GW", 0, 3, 0) N80 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 ;==> MCS position X0.333 Y0.000 Z11.000 N90 M30 _CORCOMP is 3, as in the previous example, but the co...

  • Page 1576

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions 1576 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Figure 17-54 Tool length compensation, example 6 If the sample program is continued after N110 with the following instructions: N120 _CORVAL[0] = 0.0 N130 r1 = settcor(_CORVAL, "GW", 0...

  • Page 1577

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1577 N90 t1 d1 g18 g0 N100 r1 = settcor(_CORVAL, "GW", 1, 3, 1) N110 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 ; ==> MCS position X24.330 Y0.000 Z17.500 N120 M30 In this case, all wear components of the tool are...

  • Page 1578

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions 1578 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 N130 rot y 30 N140 t1 d1 g18 g0 N150 r1 = settcor(_CORVAL, "W", 1, 1) N160 t1 d1 x0 y0 z0 ; ==> MCS position X7.990 Y25.000 Z31.160 In N90 the setting data is enabled: SD42930 $SC...

  • Page 1579

    W1: Tool offset 17.15 Examples Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1579 $TC_DP12[1,1] : 2.010 ; Wear L1 ;(= 10 -15*cos(30) + 10*sin(30)) $TC_DP13[1,1] : -16.160 ; Wear L2 ;(= -15*sin(30) - 10*cos(30)) $TC_DP14[1,1] : -5.000 ; Wear L3 The effect of setting dat...

  • Page 1580

    W1: Tool offset 17.16 Data lists Basic Functions 1580 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.16 Data lists 17.16.1 Machine data 17.16.1.1 NC-specific machine data Number Identifier: $MN_ Description 18082 MM_NUM_TOOL Number of tools that the NCK can manage (SRAM) 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CA...

  • Page 1581

    W1: Tool offset 17.16 Data lists Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1581 Number Identifier: $MC_ Description 20180 TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_INCR[i] Rotary axis increment of the toolholder with orientation capability 20182 TOCARR_ROT_ANGLE_OFFSET[i] Rotary axis offset of toolh...

  • Page 1582

    W1: Tool offset 17.16 Data lists Basic Functions 1582 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 17.16.2 Setting data 17.16.2.1 Channelspecific setting data Number Identifier: $SC_ Description 42442 TOOL_OFFSET_INCR_PROG Tool length compensation 42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE Core limit angle, for...

  • Page 1583

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1583 Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 1818.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) 18.1.1 Signals from PLC to NC (DB10) DB10 DBX56.4 - DBX56.7 Key-operated switch positions 0 to 3 Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic D...

  • Page 1584

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1584 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB10 DBX103.5 AT box ready Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The AT box for expansion mod...

  • Page 1585

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1585 DB10 DBX104.7 NCK CPU ready Signal state 0 The NCK CPU is not ready. If a sign-of-life is not received from the NCK, the PLC/NCK interface is ne...

  • Page 1586

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1586 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB10 DBX108.7 NC ready Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The control system is ready. This interface signal is ...

  • Page 1587

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1587 DB10 DBX109.5 NCU heat sink temperature alarm Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 In the NCU, the limit values of...

  • Page 1588

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1588 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB10 DBX109.7 NCK battery alarm Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The NCK battery voltage monitoring function h...

  • Page 1589

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1589 DB19 DBX0.1 Darken screen Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The screen is darkened by the...

  • Page 1590

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1590 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB19 DBX0.3 Clear cancel alarms Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 Clear error key on the machine control panel is not pressed. Functionality...

  • Page 1591

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1591 DB19 DBB7 Analog spindle 2, utilization in percent Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically DB19 DBB8 Channel number of the machi...

  • Page 1592

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1592 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB19 DBX13.7 Part program selection Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Selection active Si...

  • Page 1593

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1593 DB19 DBX16.0 - DBX16.6 PLC index for the user control file Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Description This byte for controll...

  • Page 1594

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1594 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB19 DBX45.1 FC9 Out: Done Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically DB19 DBX45.2 FC9 Out: Error Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) u...

  • Page 1595

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1595 DB19 DBX20.4 Recall alarm deleted Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Recall alarm deleted inactive Signal state ...

  • Page 1596

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1596 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB19 DBX26.1 OK Part program handling status) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Transfer correctly completed Si...

  • Page 1597

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1597 DB19 DBX26.5 Unload (part program handling status) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Unload active Signal state ...

  • Page 1598

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1598 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB19 DBB27 Error program handling Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Error codes: aaa Value Meaning 0 No error 1 Invalid number f...

  • Page 1599

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1599 DB21, ... DBX6.2 Delete distance-to-go (channel-specific) Special cases, errors, .... Delete distance-to-go (channel-specific) When the axes have b...

  • Page 1600

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1600 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.1.8 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX1.0 Drive test travel enable Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal s...

  • Page 1601

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1601 DB31, ... DBX1.3 Axis/spindle disable The reset of the interface signal does not take effect until the axis/spindle is stationary, i.e. an inter...

  • Page 1602

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1602 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX1.3 Axis/spindle disable If the interface signal is set, the following interface signals have no effect with regard to the braking ...

  • Page 1603

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1603 DB31, ... DBX1.4 Follow-up mode Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Follow-up mode is active. • The position set...

  • Page 1604

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1604 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX1.5 - DBX1.6 Position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / Position measuring system 2 (PMS2) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclica...

  • Page 1605

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1605 DB31, ... DBX1.5 - DBX1.6 Position measuring system 1 (PMS1) / Position measuring system 2 (PMS2) Application example(s) 1. Switching over from ...

  • Page 1606

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1606 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX2.1 Controller enable Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Controller is enabled. The position contro...

  • Page 1607

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1607 DB31, ... DBX2.1 Controller enable Application example(s) Mechanical clamping of an axis If the axis is positioned at the clamping position, the...

  • Page 1608

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1608 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX2.2 Delete distance-to-go (axis-specific) / spindle reset Special cases, errors, .... "Delete distance-to-go (axis-specific)&q...

  • Page 1609

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1609 DB31, ... DBX20.1 Ramp-function generator disable Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 A rapid stop with speed setp...

  • Page 1610

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1610 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX21.3 - DBX21.4 Motor selection A, B Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Switchover between four different motors or ...

  • Page 1611

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1611 DB31, ... DBX21.6 Integrator disable, speed controller Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The integrator (I compo...

  • Page 1612

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1612 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.1.9 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) Note SINAMICS S120: Message word (MELDW) The message word (MELDW) is only contained in PROFIdrive tele...

  • Page 1613

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1613 DB31, ... DBX61.3 Follow-up active (feedback) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The control signals that the fo...

  • Page 1614

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1614 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX61.5 Position controller active (status) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The control signals th...

  • Page 1615

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1615 DB31, ... DBX61.7 Current controller active (status) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The current controller f...

  • Page 1616

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1616 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX92.1 Ramp-function generator disable active (feedback) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Ramp func...

  • Page 1617

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1617 DB31, ... DBX93.0 - DBX93.2 Active drive parameter set A, B, C (feedback) Corresponding to ... DB31, ... DBX21.0 - DBX21.2 (drive parameter set ...

  • Page 1618

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1618 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX93.6 Speed controller integrator disabled (feedback) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The request...

  • Page 1619

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1619 DB31, ... DBX94.1 Heat sink temperature prewarning Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The heat sink temperature of...

  • Page 1620

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.1 Various interface signals and functions (A2) Basic Functions 1620 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX94.3 |Md| < Mdx Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The current torque utilization is below the t...

  • Page 1621

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1621 DB31, ... DBX94.6 nact = nset Signal state 0 The actual speed value is outside the tolerance band around the speed setpoint (speed threshold value 4,...

  • Page 1622

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Basic Functions 1622 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX1.1 Enable protection zones Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 No effect Application example(s) This allows protection zones to be rele...

  • Page 1623

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1623 18.2.2 Signals from channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX272.0 – DBX273.1 Machine-related protection zone 1 ( ...10) pre-activated Edge evaluation: No Sign...

  • Page 1624

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Basic Functions 1624 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX276.0 – DBX277.1 Machine-related protection zone 1 (...10) violated Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or ed...

  • Page 1625

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.2 Axis monitoring, protection zones (A3) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1625 DB31, ... DBX3.6 Velocity/spindle speed limitation Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The NCK limits...

  • Page 1626

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.3 Continuous-path mode, exact stop and LookAhead (B1) Basic Functions 1626 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX12.2 - DBX12.3 2nd software limit switch plus or minus Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 1st software limit switch for the...

  • Page 1627

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.3 Continuous-path mode, exact stop and LookAhead (B1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1627 18.3.2 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX60.6 Position reached with exact stop coarse Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) up...

  • Page 1628

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.4 Travel to fixed stop (F1) Basic Functions 1628 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.4 Travel to fixed stop (F1) 18.4.1 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX1.1 Acknowledge fixed stop reached Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cycli...

  • Page 1629

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.4 Travel to fixed stop (F1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1629 DB31, ... DBX3.1 Enable travel to fixed stop Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Meaning when FXS function is select...

  • Page 1630

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.5 Help function output to PLC (H2) Basic Functions 1630 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX62.5 Fixed stop reached Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The fixed stop was reached after sel...

  • Page 1631

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.5 Help function output to PLC (H2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1631 DB21, ... DBX59.0 - DBX59.4 M fct. 1-5 not decoded Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: job-controlled by NCK Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 M functio...

  • Page 1632

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.5 Help function output to PLC (H2) Basic Functions 1632 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBB98 - DBB115 S functions 1 to 3 Extended address S functions 1 to 3 Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: job-controlled by NCK Signal state 1 or ...

  • Page 1633

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.5 Help function output to PLC (H2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1633 DB21, ... DBB129 D function 1 Application example(s) Implementation of protective functions. Special cases, errors, ...... D0 is reserved for deselecting the cu...

  • Page 1634

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.5 Help function output to PLC (H2) Basic Functions 1634 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBB158 - DBB193 F functions 1 to 6 Extended address F functions 1 to 6 Application example(s) Control of programmed F word by the PLC, e.g. through ove...

  • Page 1635

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1635 DB31, ... DBD86 M auxiliary function for spindle Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Jobcontrolled The values for the M3, M4, M5...

  • Page 1636

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1636 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB11 DBX0.1 MDA mode Signal irrelevant for ... DB11 DBX0.4 (operating mode, changeover inhibit) = 1 Corresponding to ... DB11 DBX...

  • Page 1637

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1637 DB11 DBX0.5 Mode group stop Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 An NC Stop i...

  • Page 1638

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1638 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB11 DBX0.7 Mode group reset Corresponding to ... DB21, ... DBX7.7 (channel reset) DB11 DBX6.7 (all channels in the reset status)...

  • Page 1639

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1639 DB11 DBX1.2 Machine function REF Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Machine...

  • Page 1640

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1640 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB11 DBX1.7 Single block type A Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 If DB11 DBX1.7 is not set and DB11 DBX1.6 is set, then it i...

  • Page 1641

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1641 DB11 DBX5.0 Selected machine function TEACH IN Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0...

  • Page 1642

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1642 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB11 DBX6.0 Data block Active mode AUTOMATIC Signal(s) from the mode group (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: ...

  • Page 1643

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1643 DB11 DBX6.3 Mode group ready Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 The mode group is not ready. Possible causes for this are: •...

  • Page 1644

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1644 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB11 DBX7.1 Active REPOS machine function Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1...

  • Page 1645

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1645 DB21, ... DBX0.5 Activate M01 Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Activation of program control "...

  • Page 1646

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1646 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBB2 Activate skip block Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Skip blocks marked in the part ...

  • Page 1647

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1647 DB21, ... DBX7.0 NC Start disable Special cases, errors, ...... The start of a part program selected in the channel by part program ...

  • Page 1648

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1648 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX7.3 NC Stop Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 AUTOMATIC or MDI mode: Processing of the ...

  • Page 1649

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1649 DB21, ... DBX31.0 - DBX31.2 REPOS mode (A, B, C) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically REPOS mode for repositioning to ...

  • Page 1650

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1650 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX32.4 Approach block active Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The approach block for t...

  • Page 1651

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1651 DB21, ... DBX32.6 Last action block active Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The last action bloc...

  • Page 1652

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1652 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX33.5 M02/M30 active Screen Application example(s) The PLC can detect the end of program processing with this signal...

  • Page 1653

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1653 DB21, ... DBX33.7 Program test active Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 Program control program t...

  • Page 1654

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1654 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX35.1 Program status wait Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 The running program is wa...

  • Page 1655

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1655 DB21, ... DBX35.5 Channel status active Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 In this channel: • A...

  • Page 1656

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1656 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX36.4 Interrupt processing active Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 One or more chann...

  • Page 1657

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1657 DB21, ... DBX37.7 Stop at block end is ignored during single block (SBL) Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: The following ma...

  • Page 1658

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1658 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBB317.1 Workpiece setpoint reached Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state = 1 The number of m...

  • Page 1659

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1659 DB21, ... DBX318.0 ASUB is stopped Typical sequence of an ASUB with REPOSA: ASUB with REPOSA is triggered in the status AUTOMATI...

  • Page 1660

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1660 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX319.0 Acknowledgement of the REPOS mode change Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Edge change 0 →...

  • Page 1661

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1661 DB21, ... DBX319.1 - DBX319.3 Active REPOS mode (A, B, C) Example of the sequence of REPOS acknowledgements in the part program ...

  • Page 1662

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1662 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX319.5 Repos DEFERAL Chan Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 All axes currently contro...

  • Page 1663

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1663 DB21, ... DBX384.0 Control program branching Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Signal state 1 GOTOS in the part program ini...

  • Page 1664

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.6 Mode group, channel, program operation, reset response (K1) Basic Functions 1664 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX70.1 REPOS offset valid Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The range o...

  • Page 1665

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.7 Axis types, coordinate systems, frames (K2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1665 DB31, ... DBX76.4 Path axis Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The axis is involved in the path (pa...

  • Page 1666

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.8 Emergency stop (N2) Basic Functions 1666 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.8 Emergency stop (N2) 18.8.1 Signals to NC (DB10) DB10 DBX56.1 Emergency stop Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1...

  • Page 1667

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.8 Emergency stop (N2) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1667 DB10 DBX56.2 Acknowledge emergency stop Special cases, errors, ...... The emergency stop state cannot be reset using the interface signal: DB21, ... DBX7.7 (reset). Cor...

  • Page 1668

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.9 PLC basic program (P3) Basic Functions 1668 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.9 PLC basic program (P3) To describe the NC/PLC interface signals, refer to: References: Functions Manual, Basic Functions; PLC Basic Program (P3) Chapter: "Signal...

  • Page 1669

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.10 Reference point approach (R1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1669 DB21, ... DBX33.0 Referencing active Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The channel-specific referencin...

  • Page 1670

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.10 Reference point approach (R1) Basic Functions 1670 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.10.3 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX2.4 - DBX2.7 Reference point value 1 to 4 Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 ...

  • Page 1671

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.10 Reference point approach (R1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1671 18.10.4 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX60.4 Referenced/synchronized 1 Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal state 1 or edge change 0...

  • Page 1672

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.10 Reference point approach (R1) Basic Functions 1672 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX71.4 POS_RESTORED 1 Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 If MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE is set to a value of...

  • Page 1673

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1673 18.11 Spindles (S1) 18.11.1 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX2.2 Spindle reset/delete distancetogo Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: cyclic Edge change 0 ...

  • Page 1674

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1674 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX16.0 - DBX16.2 Actual gear stage A to C Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 (statuscontrolled) If the new gear stage is engaged, the PLC u...

  • Page 1675

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1675 DB31, ... DBX16.3 Gear is changed over Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 When the new gear stage is engaged, the PLC user sets...

  • Page 1676

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1676 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX16.7 Delete S value Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Edge change 0 → 1 Control mode: • Spindle stops • Program continues to run • Spindle cont...

  • Page 1677

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1677 DB31, ... DBX17.6 Invert M3/M4 Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The direction of rotation of the spindle motor changes for t...

  • Page 1678

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1678 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX18.5 Oscillation enable Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 If the gear stage is to be changed (DB31, ... DBX82.3 (c...

  • Page 1679

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1679 DB31, ... DBX18.6 - DBX18.7 Oscillation direction of rotation counter-clockwise / oscillation direction of rotation clockwise Edge evaluation: yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Sig...

  • Page 1680

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1680 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX60.0 Spindle/no axis Signal state 0 or edge change 1 → 0 The machine axis is operated as an axis The interface signals to the axis (DB31, ... DBB12 - DBB15) an...

  • Page 1681

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1681 DB31, ... DBX82.3 Change gear Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Specification of gear stage: • Manual specification using M function M41 - M45 correspond...

  • Page 1682

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1682 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX83.1 Setpoint speed limited (programmed speed too high) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The effective s...

  • Page 1683

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1683 DB31, ... DBX83.2 Setpoint speed increased (programmed speed too low) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The effective ...

  • Page 1684

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1684 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX83.5 Spindle in setpoint range Application example(s) Feed enable in the channel only at the end of the acceleration phase of the spindle: IF ( DB31, ... DBX83.5...

  • Page 1685

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1685 DB31, ... DBX84.3 Rigid tapping active Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 • Rigid tapping active. Application example(s) Notice! If the following signals are set during ...

  • Page 1686

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1686 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX85.5 Spindle in position Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically The interface signal is processed exclusively with the function spindle positioning...

  • Page 1687

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1687 DB31, ... DBB88 S function for spindle Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 An S function was output from the NCK to the ...

  • Page 1688

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions 1688 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX132.4 Sensor S4 available (piston end position) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Power-up Signal state 1 Sensor S4 is available. Signal state 0 Sensor S4...

  • Page 1689

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.11 Spindles (S1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1689 DB31, ... DBW134 Status of the clamping system (sensor S1) 5 Releasing with tool 6 Releasing without tool 7 Clamped with tool AND S4 == 0 8 Clamped with tool AND S4 == 1 9 Cl...

  • Page 1690

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1690 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.12 Feeds (V1) 18.12.1 Signals to channel (DB21, ...) DB21, ... DBX0.6 Activate dry run feed Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 ...

  • Page 1691

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1691 DB21, ... DBB4 Feedrate override Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The feedrate override can be defined via the PLC in binary...

  • Page 1692

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1692 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBB5 Rapid traverse override Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The rapid traverse override can be entered via the ...

  • Page 1693

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1693 DB21, ... DBX6.0 Feed disable Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The signal is active in one channel in all operating modes. ...

  • Page 1694

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1694 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB21, ... DBX6.7 Feedrate override active Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 The feedrate override between 0 and a maximum of...

  • Page 1695

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1695 DB21, ... DBX24.6 Dry run feedrate selected Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 Dry run feedrate is selected. Instead of the p...

  • Page 1696

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1696 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB 21, ... DBX29.0 - DBX29.3 Activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4 for path/geometry axes Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Description These signals are used to select/d...

  • Page 1697

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1697 18.12.2 Signals to axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBB0 Feedrate override (axis-specific) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Signal state 1 or edge change 0 ...

  • Page 1698

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1698 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBB0 Feedrate override (axis-specific) Corresponding to ... DB31, ... DBX1.7 (override effective) MD12010 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_AX_SPEED [n] (evaluation of the axis feedrate o...

  • Page 1699

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1699 DB31, ... DBX3.2 - DBX3.5 Activate fixed feedrate 1 - 4 for machine axes Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclically Description These signals are used to select/de-select ...

  • Page 1700

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1700 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DB31, ... DBX4.3 Feed stop / spindle stop (axis-specific) Application example(s) Feed stop: The traversing motion of the machine axes is not started with "feed stop", i...

  • Page 1701

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1701 DB31, ... DBB19 Spindle override Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 In gray coding, the following codes are assigned to the individual switch settings: The factors listed in t...

  • Page 1702

    Z1: NC/PLC interface signals 18.12 Feeds (V1) Basic Functions 1702 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 18.12.3 Signals from axis/spindle (DB31, ...) DB31, ... DBX62.2 Revolutional feed rate active Edge evaluation: no Signal(s) updated: cyclic Signal state 1 or edge change 0 → 1 ...

  • Page 1703

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1703 Appendix AA.1 List of abbreviations A O Output ADI4 (Analog drive interface for 4 axes) AC Adaptive Control ALM Active Line Module ARM Rotating induction motor AS PLC ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange: Ame...

  • Page 1704

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions 1704 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 C CI Connector Input CF Card Compact Flash Card CNC Computerized Numerical Control: Computer-Supported Numerical Control CO Connector Output CoL Certificate of License COM Communication CPA Com...

  • Page 1705

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1705 I I Input I/O Input/Output ENC Encoder: Actual value encoder EFP Compact I/O module (PLC I/O module) ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Devices EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility EN European standard ...

  • Page 1706

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions 1706 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 G GSDML Generic Station Description Markup Language: XML-based description language for creating a GSD file GUD Global User Data: Global user data H HEX Abbreviation for hexadecimal number ...

  • Page 1707

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1707 L LAI Logic Machine Axis Image: Logical machine axes image LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display: Liquid crystal display LED Light Emitting Diode: Light-emitting diode LF Line Feed...

  • Page 1708

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions 1708 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 O OB Organization block in the PLC OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer OP Operator Panel: Operating equipment OPI Operator Panel Interface: Interface for connection to the operator panel OPT O...

  • Page 1709

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1709 Q QEC Quadrant Error Compensation R RAM Random Access Memory: Read/write memory REF REFerence point approach function REPOS REPOSition function RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer: Type o...

  • Page 1710

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions 1710 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 S SMI Sensor Module Integrated SPF Sub Routine File: Subprogram (NC) PLC Programmable Logic Controller SRAM Static RAM (non-volatile) TNRC Tool Nose Radius Compensation SRM Synchronous Rotary M...

  • Page 1711

    Appendix A.1 List of abbreviations Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1711 V VDI Internal communication interface between NCK and PLC VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure [Association of German Engineers] VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker [Association of German Elect...

  • Page 1712

    Appendix A.2 Documentation overview Basic Functions 1712 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 A.2 Documentation overview

  • Page 1713

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1713 Glossary Absolute dimensions A destination for an axis motion is defined by a dimension that refers to the origin of the currently active coordinate system. See → Incremental dimension Acceleration with jerk limitation In order...

  • Page 1714

    Glossary Basic Functions 1714 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions enable → part programs to transfer → parameters to the → PLC, which then trigger reactions defined by the machine manufacturer. Axes In accordance with their functional sc...

  • Page 1715

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1715 Baud rate Rate of data transfer (bits/s). Blank Workpiece as it is before it is machined. Block "Block" is the term given to any files required for creating and processing programs. Block search For debugging...

  • Page 1716

    Glossary Basic Functions 1716 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 COM Component of the NC for the implementation and coordination of communication. Compensation axis Axis with a setpoint or actual value modified by the compensation value Compensation table Table containing interpola...

  • Page 1717

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1717 Cycles Protected subprograms for execution of repetitive machining operations on the → workpiece. Data block 1. Data unit of the → PLC that → HIGHSTEP programs can access. 2. Data unit of the → NC: Data modules...

  • Page 1718

    Glossary Basic Functions 1718 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Exact stop When an exact stop statement is programmed, the position specified in a block is approached exactly and, if necessary, very slowly. To reduce the approach time, → exact stop limits are defined for rapid t...

  • Page 1719

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1719 Functionality The path-jerk limitation can be activated/deactivated by programming the setting data. Parameter: Value ● Value range: TRUE, FALSE Application: ● Part program ● Static synchronized action Geometry D...

  • Page 1720

    Glossary Basic Functions 1720 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 HIGHSTEP Summary of programming options for → PLCs of the AS300/AS400 system. HW Config SIMATIC S7 tool for the configuration and parameterization of hardware components within an S7 project Identifier In accordance...

  • Page 1721

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1721 Interpolatory compensation Interpolatory compensation is a tool that enables manufacturing-related leadscrew error and measuring system error compensations (SSFK, MSFK). Interrupt routine Interrupt routines are special...

  • Page 1722

    Glossary Basic Functions 1722 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Leadscrew error compensation Compensation for the mechanical inaccuracies of a leadscrew participating in the feed. The controller uses stored deviation values for the compensation. Limit speed Maximum/minimum (spindl...

  • Page 1723

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1723 Machining channel A channel structure can be used to shorten idle times by means of parallel motion sequences, e.g. moving a loading gantry simultaneously with machining. Here, a CNC channel must be regarded as a separ...

  • Page 1724

    Glossary Basic Functions 1724 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Mode An operating concept on a SINUMERIK controller. The following modes are defined: → Jog, → MDA, → Automatic. Mode group Axes and spindles that are technologically related can be combined into one mode group....

  • Page 1725

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1725 Offset memory Data range in the control, in which the tool offset data is stored. Oriented spindle stop Stops the workpiece spindle in a specified angular position, e.g. in order to perform additional machining at a pa...

  • Page 1726

    Glossary Basic Functions 1726 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Path axis Path axes include all machining axes of the → channel that are controlled by the → interpolator in such a way that they start, accelerate, stop, and reach their end point simultaneously. Path feedrate Pa...

  • Page 1727

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1727 Polar coordinates A coordinate system which defines the position of a point on a plane in terms of its distance from the origin and the angle formed by the radius vector with a defined axis. Polynomial interpolation Po...

  • Page 1728

    Glossary Basic Functions 1728 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Programmable working area limitation Limitation of the motion space of the tool to a space defined by programmed limitations. Programming key Characters and character strings that have a defined meaning in the program...

  • Page 1729

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1729 Rounding axis Rounding axes rotate a workpiece or tool to an angular position corresponding to an indexing grid. When a grid index is reached, the rounding axis is "in position". RS-232-C Serial interface for...

  • Page 1730

    Glossary Basic Functions 1730 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Standard cycles Standard cycles are provided for machining operations which are frequently repeated: ● For the drilling/milling technology ● For turning technology The available cycles are listed in the "Cycl...

  • Page 1731

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1731 Synchronized axis A synchronized axis is the → gantry axis whose set position is continuously derived from the motion of the → leading axis and is, thus, moved synchronously with the leading axis. From the point of...

  • Page 1732

    Glossary Basic Functions 1732 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Tool Active part on the machine tool that implements machining (e.g. turning tool, milling tool, drill, LASER beam, etc.). Tool nose radius compensation Contour programming assumes that the tool is pointed. Because th...

  • Page 1733

    Glossary Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1733 User program User programs for the S7-300 automation systems are created using the programming language STEP 7. The user program has a modular layout and consists of individual blocks. The basic block types are: ● Co...

  • Page 1734

    Glossary Basic Functions 1734 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Working memory The working memory is a RAM in the → CPU that the processor accesses when processing the application program. Workpiece Part to be made/machined by the machine tool. Workpiece contour Set contour of t...

  • Page 1735

    Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1735 Index $ $A_MONIFACT, 1567,1567 $AA_ACC, 1379,1379 $AA_ 222,ATOL, 222 $AA_ETRA 753,NS, 753 $AA_FGREF, 327, 327 $AA_ 327,FGROUP, 327 $AA_MOTE 1381,ND, 1381 $AA_ 1230,S, 1230 1230, $AA_SCPAR, 1382,1382 $AA_VLFCT, 1316,1316 $AA...

  • Page 1736

    Index Basic Functions 1736 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 $P_SEARCH_SDIR, 482,482 $P_SEARCH_S 1274,GEAR, 1274 $P_SEARCH_SPOS, 482,482 $P_SEARCH_SPOSMODE, 482,482 $P_S 1274,GEAR, 1274 $P_SIM, 476,476 476, $P_STO 225,LF, 225 $P_SUB_AUTOGEAR, 618, 618 $P_SUB 619,_AXFCT, 619 $P_...

  • Page 1737

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1737 Autonomous singleaxis operations, 428,AUXFUDEL, 428 428,AUXFUDELG, 428 AUXFUMSE 417,Q, 417 AUXFUSYNC, 427,427 auxiliary function Associated, 402, 402 Auxiliary function Address extensio 393,n, 393 -counter, 423,423 4...

  • Page 1738

    Index Basic Functions 1738 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Channel-specific NCK alarm is active, 36,36 Chart status, 1113,1113 Clamping monitoring, 86,86 Clearance angle 1499,, 1499 Closed-loop 350,control, 350 CL 569,RINT, 569 Coarse offset 651,, 651 Collision detection, 14...

  • Page 1739

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1739 DBX56.6, 1583,1583 DBX56.7, 1583,1583 DBX92.0, 842,842 DBX92.1, 842,842 DB11 1635,DBX0.0, 1635 1635,DBX0.1, 1635 1636,DBX0.2, 1636 1636,DBX0.4, 1636 1637,DBX0.5, 1637 1637,DBX0.6, 1637 1637,DBX0.7, 1637 DBX07.7...

  • Page 1740

    Index Basic Functions 1740 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1662,DBB376, 1662 DBB4, 1691,1691 DBB5, 1692,1692 DBB58, DBB58 - DBB67, 410,410 DBB60 - DBB64, 1631,1631 DBB60 - DBB65, 1630,1630 DBB66 - DBB67, 1631,1631 DBB68 - DBB 410,112, 410 DBB68 - DBB97, 1631,1631 1304,D...

  • Page 1741

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1741 1214,DBB2.1, 1214 DBB60.4, 1210,1210 DBB60.5, 1210,1210 DBB68ff., 1304,1304 DBB78 - DBB 1702,81, 1702 1686,DBB86, 1686 1687,DBB88, 1687 DBD 1634,78, 1634 DBD8 1635,6, 1635 1635, DBD8 1635,8, 1635 1635, DBW134, 168...

  • Page 1742

    Index Basic Functions 1742 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 DBX68.0 - DBX68.3, 1307,1307 72,DBX69.0, 72 DBX69.0 - DBX69.2, 1615,1615 72,DBX69.1, 72 72,DBX69.2, 72 1315,DBX7.7, 1315 1663,DBX70.0, 1663 1664,DBX70.1, 1664 1664,DBX70.2, 1664 1672,DBX71.4, 1672 1672,DBX71.5,...

  • Page 1743

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1743 E Emergency stop Acknowledgem 794,ent, 794 791,Interface, 791 Sequen 792,ce, 792 Emergency stop control elem 791,ents, 791 ENABLE, 569,569 Encoder coding, 340,340 Encoder directly at the tool, 335,335 Encoder monitori...

  • Page 1744

    Index Basic Functions 1744 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Frame rotatio 652,ns, 652 in the direction of the tool, 761,761 with solid angles, 758, 758 1375,FRC, 1375 1375,FRCM, 1375 1375, Free-form surface mode, 162,162 Free-form surfaces, 212,212 mode, 212,212 Function int...

  • Page 1745

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1745 835,PLC/MCP, 835 PLC/NCK, 825,825 Interface signals Acknowledge emergency stop, 1666,1666 Acknowledge fixed stop reached, 1628,1628 Action block active, 1649,1649 Activate associated M1, 1630,1630 Activate channel-s...

  • Page 1746

    Index Basic Functions 1746 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 FC9 Out\ Error, 1594,1594 FC9 Out\ Sta 1594,rtError, 1594 1594, Feed stop (Geometry axis 1 to 3), 1694,1694 Feed stop / spindle stop 1699,(axis-specific), 1699 Feedrate dis 1693,able, 1693 Feedrate override, 1691,1691...

  • Page 1747

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1747 REPOS offset v 1664,alid, 1664 Repos Path Mode Ackn 1660,0-2, 1660 REPOSDELAY 1664,, 1664 REPOSMODEEDGEACKN 1660,, 1660 Reset, 1648,1648 Re-synchronizing spindle when positioning 1 and 1676,2, 1676 Resynchronizing spind...

  • Page 1748

    Index Basic Functions 1748 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 Limit velocity, for path axes, 1337,1337 Limited toolholder orientation, 1472,1472 Limit-switch monitoring, 103,103 1303,LIMS, 1303 Linear feedrate (G94) 1339,, 1339 Linear signal distortions, 80,80 Loader axes, 662...

  • Page 1749

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1749 MD11 1406,346, 1406 MD11 1458,410, 1458 MD11 468,411, 468 MD11 519,450, 519 MD11 520,470, 520 MD11 1355,550, 1355 MD11 564,600, 564 MD11 566,602, 566 MD11 566,604, 566 MD11 571,610, 571 MD11 548,620, 548 MD12 1361,000, 13...

  • Page 1750

    Index Basic Functions 1750 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD20 1463,252, 1463 MD20 1465,256, 1465 MD20 1538,270, 1538 MD20 1538,272, 1538 MD20 506,310, 506 MD20 1579,360, 1579 MD20 1527,390, 1527 MD20 1524,392, 1524 MD20 189,400, 189 MD20 190,430, 190 MD20 190,440, 190 MD20 193,...

  • Page 1751

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1751 MD26 605,012, 605 MD27 805,100, 805 MD27 467,800, 467 MD27 631,850, 631 MD27 632,860, 632 MD27 635,880, 635 MD27 635,882, 635 MD28 585,060, 585 MD28 219,070, 219 MD28 712,080, 712 MD28 713,081, 713 MD28 1487,082, 1487 MD2...

  • Page 1752

    Index Basic Functions 1752 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 MD34092, MD34 1188,093, 1188 MD34 1208,100, 1208 MD34 1199,102, 1199 MD34 1201,104, 1201 MD34 1176,110, 1176 MD34 1258,200, 1258 MD34 1213,210, 1213 MD34 1213,230, 1213 MD34232, MD34 1195,300, 1195 MD34 1192,320, 1192 M...

  • Page 1753

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1753 Message signals in D 1041,B2, 1041 Mirroring Frames, 698,698 Retraction direction (lift 567,fast), 567 Modal activation (FOCON/FOCOF), 300,300 300, Mode AUTOMATI 458,C, 458 JOG, 458,458 JOG in AUTOMATIC, 458,458 458,...

  • Page 1754

    Index Basic Functions 1754 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 HMI 871,monitor, 871 Key 870,disable, 870 Program 868,list, 868 -Versions, 811,811 POINTER, 1042,1042 POINTER in FB, 1043,1043 POINTER in FC, 1042,1042 1351,POLF, 1351 POLFMASK, 1351,1351 POLFMLIN 1351,, 1351 Pol...

  • Page 1755

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1755 S S functions, 372,372 S..., 1301,1301 569,SAVE, 569 SBLOF, 575,575 578,SBLON, 578 1381,SCPARA, 1381 Screen bright, 36,36 SD411 1340,00, 1340 SD412 1296,00, 1296 SD420 1348,10, 1348 SD421 1365,00, 1365 SD421 1366,0...

  • Page 1756

    Index Basic Functions 1756 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 do not stop, depending on the situation, 577,577 Program operation 471,mode, 471 -reactivate suppression in the 578,ASUB, 578 573,SBL1, 573 573,SBL2, 573 SBL2 with implicit preprocessing stop, 574,574 573,SBL3, 573...

  • Page 1757

    Index Basic Functions Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1757 -offset data, 1417,1417 -parameters, 1413,1413 -retrac 600,tion, 600 Selec 1392,t, 1392 -shape, 1422,1422 1422, -shape, a 1424,ctive, 1424 -size, activ 1424,e, 1424 T function, 1392,1392 Tool base dimension/adapter di...

  • Page 1758

    Index Basic Functions 1758 Function Manual, 03/2013, 6FC5397-0BP40-3BA1 1303,VELOLIM, 1303 Vertical axes, 296,296 W WAITEN 600,C, 600 WAITS, 1303,1303 1303, WALCS0, 112,112 110,WALIMOF, 110 WALIMON, 110,110 37,WCS, 37 Work offset $P_EXTFRAME, 806,806 Working area limitation, 106,106 ...

x